Harman Becker Automotive Systems 9632 Porsche PCM3.1 MOPF Headunit User Manual PCM3 1

Harman Becker Automotive Systems Porsche PCM3.1 MOPF Headunit PCM3 1

Manual

Dear Customer,In this operating manual you will learn about the various functions of the PCM (Porsche Communi-cation Management) system and its operating op-tions. To prevent danger to yourself and to others, please start by familiarising yourself with your PCM.On-board literatureKeep the on-board literature in the vehicle at all times and if you ever come to sell your vehicle, please hand it over to the new owner.SuggestionsDo you have any questions, suggestions or ideas about your vehicle or the on-board literature? Please write to us:Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AGVertrieb Customer RelationsPorschestraße 15-1971634 Ludwigsburg GermanyOrientation aids in the operating manual This operating manual contains four orientation aids to help you quickly locate the information you want. They are each shown against a yellow back-ground.The master table of contents offers you an overview of the structure of the entire manual. In the section table of contents you will find de-tailed listings of the individual topics.The index enables you to find the various topics with the help of keywords.EquipmentThere may be some differences in equipment and technology with respect to the illustrations and de-scriptions due to the ongoing development of the systems and the varying laws in individual coun-tries.The equipment versions shown are not always in-cluded as standard. Some of the functions de-scribed in this operating manual are optional equipment and may not be available in your PCM. If this is the case, the relevant menu items will not be available to you.
2Porsche, the Porsche Crest, Panamera, Carrera, Targa, Boxster, Cayenne, Tiptronic and Tequipment are registered trademarks of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.Printed in Germany.Reprinting (including excerpts) as well as all other forms of reproduction are prohibited without the written permission of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AGPorscheplatz 170435 Stuttgart GermanyWKD 952 220 10 03/09
Contents 3ContentsUsing the PCM..................................... 6Important information on operation and road safety.....................................................6Introduction to operation .................................7Menu types and options for operation.............12Sound settings .............................................15Sound settings with BOSE®Surround Sound System .............................................. 16Sound settings with Burmester® High-End Surround Sound System .........................17Configuring the PCM display ..........................18TUNER............................................... 22Radio ..........................................................22Making settings for radio mode......................25TV ............................................................... 27Making settings for TV mode ......................... 31DISC ................................................. 34iPod* .......................................................... 40USB.............................................................43External Bluetooth® audio source ..................48Bluetooth® settings ...................................... 49PHONE .............................................. 54Bluetooth®..................................................54Operating the Bluetooth® hands-free unit(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)..........56Telephone settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........66Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)........................................67Phonebook settings(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........70Transferring the phonebook ...........................71Operating the PCM telephone.........................72Text messages (SMS)(with PCM telephone only) ..............................83Telephone settings (PCM telephone)............................................91Call settings (PCM telephone)............................................93Bluetooth® settings (PCM telephone)............................................95Phonebook settings ......................................98Settings for messages and data (PCM telephone)..........................................100Cordless handset ........................................101INFO ............................................... 109Displaying traffic messages (TMC) ............... 109Displaying sections of the route................... 111Displaying information about the location ..... 111Displaying detailed information about the active audio source .................................... 111CAR ................................................ 113Trip data display ........................................ 113ParkAssist ................................................. 114Rear view camera ...................................... 116Logbook.................................................... 119The Sport display ....................................... 127Extended memory ...................................... 135NAVI ............................................... 140General operation....................................... 140Entering an address ................................... 141Starting/stopping route guidance ................ 143List of previous destinations........................ 144Personal destination memory ...................... 146Points of interest........................................ 151Changing options for route guidance ........... 153Stopovers (tour) ......................................... 155Destination input using geographical coordinates ........................... 158Destination input using the map................... 158Storing ...................................................... 158Off-road navigation ..................................... 159Reloading data........................................... 164
4ContentsMAP ................................................166Map display................................................ 166Voice control ...................................172How voice control works .............................172Symbols in sample dialogues....................... 173Commands................................................. 173Basic voice control functions ....................... 175Using the help function ................................ 177Operating examples.................................... 179Index...............................................194Technical data .................................202Radio frequency ranges............................... 202Tuning steps used during automatic station search ............................................ 202Regional codes for video DVDs .................... 202Affiliated countries for TV tuner country settings.......................................... 202
Using the PCM 5Using the PCMImportant information on operation and road safety.....................................................6Introduction to operation .................................7Switching the PCM on/off..............................7Setting the volume........................................8Muting .........................................................8Selecting the audio source ............................8Controls and their functions...........................9Menu types and options for operation .............12What are the menu types? ...........................12Calling up and operating menu types............12Exiting menus.............................................13Operating lists............................................13Operating input menus ................................14Sound settings..............................................15Setting the bass .........................................15Setting the treble........................................15Setting the balance.....................................15Setting the fader ........................................15Setting the loudness ...................................16Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) ........16Sound settings with BOSE®Surround Sound System ..............................................16Setting surround.........................................16Setting linear..............................................16Setting AudioPilot®.....................................16Sound settings with Burmester® High-End Surround Sound System ..................17Setting the listening position........................17Setting smooth...........................................17Setting surround.........................................17Setting live ................................................ 17Setting sound conditioner........................... 17Configuring the PCM display.......................... 18Configuring display settings........................ 18Setting the language .................................. 19Setting the units ........................................ 19Resetting personal settings ........................ 20
6Using the PCMUsing the PCMImportant information on operation and road safetyThe PCM (Porsche Communication Manage-ment) system is the central control unit for the ra-dio, TV tuner, disc mode (CD/DVD, USB, iPod and an external audio source), sound settings, on-board computer, navigation system and tele-phone. To avoid danger or injury to yourself and others while using your PCM, you must take the following into consideration:WARNING!Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle.ûOperate your PCM only when you are safely in control of your vehicle and traffic condi-tions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the PCM while the vehicle is parked.CAUTION!Injury hazard. Opening the housing or a dam-aged housing represents a hazard due to invis-ible laser radiation.ûThe PCM is a Class 1 laser product. Do not open the housing. The PCM does not contain any user-service-able parts. Any maintenance work must be performed exclusively by qualified service experts.WARNING!Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver and makes recommendations on the routes to take. This does not release you from full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle.As the driver, you must assess the traffic situ-ation. Yo u have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car.ûContinue to pay attention to the traffic situ-ation.WARNING!Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials (e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-volving explosives. Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-ple. They can interfere with technical equip-ment.ûPlease heed appropriate warnings.ûObserve statutory regulations and local re-strictions when using the telephone.
Using the PCM 7Introduction to operationSwitching the PCM on/offSwitching on/off via the ignition (permanently)ûSwitch on the ignition.The PCM is permanently active.Switching on/off via the left rotary knobIf the PCM is not to be permanently active, you can also switch it on/off using the left rotary knob.ûPress and hold the left rotary knob (volume control) for at least one second.Battery discharge protectionSwitching on/off via the left rotary knob is also possible when the ignition is off.To protect your vehicle’s battery, the PCM will au-tomatically switch itself off again after a few min-utes.NOTICERisk of damage. The PCM contains high-qual-ity electronic components which require spe-cial care with regard to maintenance. The following should be observed:– The display is sensitive to scratches.– The device must not be sprayed with liq-uids. Ingress of liquids can result in the de-struction of the equipment.ûCarefully clean your PCM periodically using a dry, clean and soft cloth (microfibre cloth) or a cleaning brush.ûDo not exert excessive pressure on the sur-face when cleaning.>>>ûUnder no circumstances may solvents such as methylated spirits, thinners, petrol, acetone or alcohol (ethanol, methanol or isopropyl alcohol) or scouring agents of any type be used.ûRemove fingerprints using a slightly damp cloth or a mild cleaning agent. ûNever spray cleaning agents or other liq-uids directly onto the display. Instead dampen a cloth and carefully wipe the dis-play clean.ûIf faults occur, do not open the PCM equip-ment yourself under any circumstances. Always have defective devices repaired by a qualified specialist workshop. We recom-mend that this work be performed by a Por-sche partner, as Porsche partners have trained workshop personnel as well as the necessary parts and tools.
8Using the PCMSetting the volumeûTurn the left rotary knob t.Depending on the situation, this adjusts the vol-ume for:– the active audio source,– a traffic announcement,– a voice control system announcement,– the ringtone during an incoming call,– hands-free mode during a telephone call.MutingMuting an audio sourceûBriefly press the left rotary knob u.This mutes the active audio source. The mute symbol is shown in the bottom line.However, navigation recommendations, tele-phone calls and traffic announcements contin-ue to be audible.Cancelling mutingûTo cancel muting, briefly press the left rotary knob u again.Muting navigation or traffic announcementsûTo interrupt a navigation or traffic announce-ment, briefly press the left rotary knob u during the announcement.Selecting the audio sourcePressing the a button opens a window where you can set the current audio source.The window closes again as soon as:– you have set an audio source or– several seconds pass and you have made no entry.1. Press the a button.2. Select the audio source you want on the dis-play.
Using the PCM 9Controls and their functionsThe controls for the PCM are arranged below the display and around the CD/DVD slot. AabuttonBp arrow buttonCLeft rotary knob v t: Sets the volumeu (press briefly): Switches on or mutes the deviceu (press and hold): Switches the device on and offDo arrow button Ebmain menu buttonFSlot for SIM cardGd main menu button Hw main menu buttonI Right rotary knob s q: Highlights a menu itemr: Selects the highlighted menu itemJi buttonKBack button h L Eject/retract button for CDs and DVDs j Mg main menu button Nf main menu button O End call button kPc main menu button Q Lift handset button lRn main menu buttonSm main menu button
10 Using the PCMA - a buttonPressing the a button opens a window where you can set the current audio source.The window closes again when:– you have set an audio source,– several seconds pass and you have made no entry.B - parrow buttonBy briefly pressing the arrow button you can: – start a search downwards in radio or TV mode,– skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode.Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in CD/DVD mode starts fast reverse.C - Left rotary knob v Pressing and holding the left rotary knob u switches the device on or off.Turning the left rotary knob t changes the fol-lowing settings:– volume of the active audio source,– volume of a traffic announcement,– volume of a voice control system announce-ment,– volume when in hands-free mode during a tele-phone call,– ringtone volume of the telephone during an in-coming call,– cancelling muting (turning the rotary knob clockwise).Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u executes the following functions:– cancels navigation and traffic announcements,– rejects an incoming telephone call,– mutes the device,– switches on the system.D - oarrow button By briefly pressing the arrow button you can: – start a search upwards in radio or TV mode,– skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode.Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in CD/DVD mode starts fast forward.E - b main menu buttonPressing the b button opens a menu where you can make the sound settings for the PCM.F - Slot for the telephone SIM cardTo use the internal telephone, you must insert the SIM card in the slot provided.Alternatively, the SIM card of a mobile phone with the Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile can be used.
Using the PCM 11G - d main menu buttonPressing the d button displays various gener-al information such as the current audio source, the date and time and the signal strength for your telephone network. H - w main menu buttonPressing the w button opens an overview of various trip data.I - Right rotary knob s Along with the touchscreen, the right rotary knob is the central control: – Turn the rotary knob q to highlight the menu item you want. –Pressr to select a highlighted menu item.J - i button Since not all of the operating options for a main menu can be shown on one display, the i menu summarises various operating options for the main menus. You call up these operating op-tions by pressing the i button.Instead of pressing the button you can also touch the tab of the same name on the dis-play.K- Back button hBy pressing the Back button h you can exe-cute various functions.Briefly press the button to:– undo a selection in the menu,– cancel a list selection.Press and hold the button to:– delete all characters already entered into an in-put menu.L - Eject button jPressing the j button executes the follow-ing functions depending on the equipment of your PCM:PCM without CD/DVD changer – A CD or DVD inserted in the drive is ejected so it can be removed.PCM with CD/DVD changer – The CD/DVD changer menu is opened. Press-ing the button again ejects the highlighted CD or DVD so it can be removed.– If you press the button for several seconds and there are still no CDs/DVDs in the changer compartments, you will be prompted to fill the individual compartments one after the other.– If you press the button for several seconds and the magazine compartments are at least par-tially full, all CDs or DVDs are ejected one after the other.M - g main menu button Pressing the g button opens the map view of the navigation function.N - f main menu button Pressing the f button opens the menu of the navigation function.O - End call button k By pressing the End call button k you can: – reject an incoming telephone call or – end an active call.P - c main menu button Pressing the c button opens the menu of the telephone function.
12 Using the PCMQ - Lift handset button l By pressing the Lift handset button l you can:– accept an incoming telephone call or – call up the quick dial function.R - n main menu button Pressing the n button opens the menu for op-erating the CD, DVD, iPod, USB, AUX and AUX BT audio sources.S - m main menu button Pressing the m button opens the menu for radio mode.Menu types and options for operationThe PCM display is a colour touchscreen. All menu functions, list entries and text input fields as well as the arrow symbols and scrollbars can be oper-ated by lightly touching the corresponding loca-tion on the display. What are the menu types?Main menusThe range of functions of the PCM is divided be-tween the following main menus:–m: radio main menu,–n: disc main menu, –c: telephone main menu, –f: navigation main menu,–g: map view, –b: sound settings,–d: information menu as well as–w: vehicle and trip data main menu. Each of these main menus contains various sub-menus for a specific topic.Option menusEach of the eight main menus has an option menu where you find settings and other functions for the respective main menu.Calling up and operating menu typesCalling up main menusûTo call up a main menu, press the appropriate button below the display.You can switch from one main menu to another at any time. When you return to a main menu, you return to the function you were using before exiting the menu. If you want to return to the top level of a main menu, you must press the relevant main menu but-ton twice in succession. Calling up option menusûTo call up an option menu, press the i button.- or - ûTouch the tab on the display with your finger.
Using the PCM 13Operating menus with the touchscreenûTouch the individual menu items or symbols di-rectly on the display.If the menu functions cannot be operated by touching the display, it is because the touch-screen is deactivated. For further information, see “Switching the touchscreen on/off” on page 19.Operating menus with the right rotary knobInstead of operation on the touchscreen, you can also operate the menu items with the right rotary knob.ûTurn the right rotary knob t to highlight a menu item.ûPress u the right rotary knob to activate the highlighted menu item.The process of highlighting q and activat-ing r using the right rotary knob or touch-ing the menu item on the display is referred to below as “selecting”.Exiting menusReturning to the next highest menuûPress the Back button h to cancel an op-eration and return to the next highest menu.Returning to the main menuûPress a main menu button to return to the cor-responding main menu.Returning to the top level of a main menuûBriefly press the appropriate main menu button twice in succession to return to the top level of the main menu.Operating lists The following operating options are available to you for selecting a list entry:ûTouch the symbols and on the display.- or - ûTouch the scrollbar between the two symbols and .- or - ûTurn the right rotary knob q.Highlighted list entries are framed in orange.Showing the first letter of list entriesTo make it easier to find your way in long lists, you can show the first letter of list entries in the follow-ing lists: – the phonebook,– the list for the music search in the iPod or in USB mode,– the track list in USB and MP3 disc mode or– the destination memory in the navigation menu.ûTouch and hold one of the two symbols and for several seconds.- or - ûQuickly turn the right rotary knob q.Only letters with corresponding entries in the list will be displayed.
14 Using the PCMOperating input menusIn many cases you can enter data into the PCM. This can be the case when entering an SMS mes-sage, a telephone number or a navigation destina-tion, for example. The various input menus are customised to their respective operating situa-tions.ûTo enter data into an input menu, lightly touch the characters on the display.- or - ûHighlight the characters by turning the right ro-tary knob q and insert them by pressing the right rotary knob r.ûTo confirm and accept the data you have en-tered, select OK.In addition to the letter fields, the input menus also provide a number of function fields for changing the character set displayed and for moving the cursor: Greyed out characters cannot be selected.In many cases the input menus are pre-sort-ed. This means that after you have entered at least three letters, only the letters for which there is an entry in a list are offered for selec-tion.deletes the last character entered(if button is touched briefly)- or -deletes all characters entered(if button is touched and held)switches to positioning mode when composing text messages (SMS)switches to uppercaseswitches to lowercaseswitches to numbers and punctua-tion marksswitches to special charactersswitches to insertion mode when composing a text messageinserts a periodinserts a commainserts a coloninserts a spacedeletes all entries in the input fieldcalls up a stored list, for example when entering an address in the nav-igation systemconfirms the input and closes theinput menu
Using the PCM 15Setting the layout for the keyboard of the input menuThe letter fields in the input menu can either be ar-ranged alphabetically or like a computer key-board. 1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM” >“Keyboard layout”.4. Select one of the two options:–“ABC”: The letter fields are arranged alphabetically.–“QWERTY/QWERZ”: The letter fields are arranged like a compu-ter keyboard.The chosen keyboard layout is set.Sound settingsYou can set the sound of your PCM for each audio source separately using the sound settings in the Sound menu. As soon as an audio source is se-lected, its sound settings are set automatically.The range of displays and functions for the sound settings depends on the vehicle type and the equipment installed. In some cases, therefore, not all of the functions described here may be availa-ble.Setting the bass1. Press the b button.2. Select “Bass”.3. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .Setting the treble1. Press the b button.2. Select “Treble”.3. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .Setting the balanceThe Balance setting allows you to set the volume distribution between the left and right speakers.1. Press the b button.2. Select “Balance”.3. Make the setting you want by touching the symbols , , and or by turning q the right rotary knob.Setting the faderThe Fader setting allows you to set the volume dis-tribution between the front and rear speakers.1. Press the b button.2. Select “Fader”.3. Make the setting you want by touching the symbols , , and or by turning q the right rotary knob.
16 Using the PCMSetting the loudness“Loudness” increases the sound volume by in-creasing the bass and treble frequencies.This setting is particularly effective for low vol-umes and guarantees a pleasant sound.1. Press the b button.2. Select “Loudness” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume)The “SDV” function automatically adjusts the audio playback volume as a function of the vehicle’s speed.You can set the degree to which the volume ad-justs to the vehicle’s speed on a scale from 0 (no increase in volume) to 5 (large increase in volume).1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SDV”.4. Make the setting you want by touching the symbols and .Sound settings with BOSE®Surround Sound System Setting surroundActivating “Surround” achieves a sound setting with greater spatial depth. This permits the creation of a virtual surround sound with conventional stereo sources such as CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example. The function can be set separately for the individ-ual audio sources. The “Surround” function is generally activated with multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for ex-ample.It cannot be activated for the sources “AM” and “TV”.1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Surround” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting linearSelecting “Linear” switches the PCM from a bass-heavy setting (linear off) to a more neutral sound (linear on).1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Linear” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting AudioPilot®If the “AudioPilot” function is activated, the noise level inside the vehicle is monitored. Background noise is analysed and the volume and dynamics of the music playback across the entire frequency spectrum is automatically adjusted.An additional sound control feature is available for vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music playback to the special requirements when driving with an open top.1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “AudioPilot” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
Using the PCM 17Sound settings with Burmester® High-End Surround Sound SystemSetting the listening positionThe “Listening position” setting allows you to opti-mise the sound settings for the front or rear seats.If, on the other hand, you select the symmetrical setting, you achieve the best possible sound set-ting taking all seats into account.1. Press the b button.2. Select “Listening position”.3. Select one of the following settings:–“Front”, –“Symmetrical” or –“Rear”. Setting smoothThe “Smooth” function is used to precisely reduce overemphasized frequencies in the midrange and treble, which may be present in highly com-pressed music material. Typical examples include playing MP3 files with a low data rate or listening to an FM station with unfavourable reception con-ditions. This function facilitates a relaxing, pleasant listen-ing experience for these sources over a long peri-od.1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET Burmester”.4. Select “Smooth” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting surroundActivating “Surround” achieves a sound setting with greater spatial depth. This permits the creation of a virtual surround sound with conventional stereo sources such as CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example. The function can be set separately for the individ-ual audio sources. The listening position is then set to “Symmetrical”.The “Surround” function is generally activated with multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for ex-ample.It cannot be activated for the sources “AM” and “TV”.1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET Burmester”.4. Select “Surround” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting liveThe “Live” function generates surround sound that sounds just like a live concert from any stereo mu-sic signal. This is achieved through the precise ad-dition of the type of reverberation and tonal com-ponents normally found in concert halls. The listening position is set to “Symmetrical” for this.1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET Burmester”.4. Select “Live” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting sound conditionerIf the “Sound conditioner” function is activated, the noise level inside the vehicle is monitored. Back-ground noise is analysed and the volume and dy-namics of the music playback across the entire frequency spectrum is automatically adjusted.An additional sound control feature is available for vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music playback to the special requirements when driving with an open top.
18 Using the PCM1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET Burmester”.4. Select “Sound conditioner” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Configuring the PCM displayYou can set various units, the date and time, the welcome display and the user language of the PCM in the “SET PCM system” menu.Configuring display settingsSwitching the display offYou can switch off or darken the display using the “Switch off display” menu.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM”>“Screen”.4. Select “Switch off display”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears.Switching the display back onYou can switch a display that is off back on at any time (if the touchscreen is active) by touching it.ûTouch anywhere on the screen with your finger.- or -ûPress any button.Choosing colours for the map view (day/night design)1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM”.4. Select “Day/night switchover”.The following options are then available for you to select:–“Automatic”Your PCM automatically switches from day design to night design as a function of the vehicle lighting.–“Day”Your PCM always remains set to the day de-sign colours. This means the display colours are optimised for legibility.–“Night”Your PCM always remains set to the night de-sign colours. The display colours are dimmed to prevent glare.5. Set the option you want by selecting it.
Using the PCM 19Choosing the brightness of the display1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM”>“Screen”>“Brightness”.4. You can set the brightness by selecting the two symbols and .Switching the touchscreen on/off1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM”.>“Screen”.4. Select “Touchscreen off” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Displaying the system versionYou have the option of viewing the system version of your PCM.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Display PCM” >“System version”.The system version is displayed.Setting the languageAdapting the language to the instrument cluster1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM language”.4. Select “Automatic”.The language of the instrument cluster is set.If the language of the instrument cluster is not available as a language in the PCM, the lan-guage “English GB” is set.Selecting the language yourself1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM language”.4. Select the language you want.Setting the unitsAdapting the units to the instrument cluster1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM units”.4. Select “Automatic”.The settings of the instrument cluster are set.
20 Using the PCMSetting the unit for consumption1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM units” >“Consump.”.4. Select one of the following units:–“l/100km”,–“km/l”,–“mpg” or–“mpg (UK)”.Setting the display unit for temperatures1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM units”>“Temperature”.4. Select either “°C (Celsius)” or “°F (Fahrenheit)”.Resetting personal settingsThis menu item allows you to reset settings you have previously made.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“Reset PCM”.4. Select one of the following options: –“Factory settings” Resets all settings to predefined values. Any data you entered (addresses, destinations and telephone numbers) is, however, re-tained.–“Vehicle handover” Resets all settings to predefined values and deletes the data you entered (addresses, destinations, telephone numbers, logbook as well as the recordings in the Sport dis-play).5. Confirm the relevant prompt by selecting “Yes”.
TUNER 21TUNERRadio ......................................................... 22Calling up the main menu for radio mode..... 22Tuning to stations ...................................... 22Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memories ....................................... 23Traffic programme (TP) .............................. 24Making settings for radio mode ..................... 25Switching RDS on/off ................................. 25Switching regionalisation on/off .................. 25Switching RDS radio text on/off .................. 25Choosing a PTY (programme type) filter ..... 26Setting sorting criteria for the FM station list 26TV............................................................... 27Calling up the main menu for TV mode ........ 27Tuning to TV stations ................................. 27Storing TV stations .................................... 28Showing the information window ................. 29Video text ................................................ 29Electronic Programme Guide ...................... 30Making settings for TV mode......................... 31Setting sorting of the station list ................. 31Setting the reception country ..................... 31Setting TV picture parameters ................... 31
22 TUNERTUNERRadio Calling up the main menu for radio modeûPress the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (AM - FM - TV) is highlight-ed in the bottom line.You will see the main menu for the chosen mode together with the station buttons. If there are al-ready stations stored on the station buttons, the names or frequencies of these stations are dis-played.If the station tuned to is broadcasting RDS signals (RDS = Radio Data System) in FM mode, you will see the information contained in these signals (e.g. station name, programme type and radio text) above the station buttons.To find out more, please refer also to the sections “Switching RDS on/off” on page 25 and “Switch-ing RDS radio text on/off” on page 25.Tuning to stationsYou have the following options for tuning to a sta-tion:– using the station buttons, – using the station list, – via a station search or – entering the frequency directly.Tuning to stations using the station buttonsTo be able to tune to a station using the station buttons, there must already be a station stored on a station button. To find out more, please refer to the section “Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memories” on page 23.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want is highlighted.2. Briefly press the station button.The station stored on the station button is tuned to.Tuning to stations using the station listThe station list contains all the stations that can currently be received. It is only available in FM mode.1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is displayed.2. Select “Station list”.The station list is opened. In addition to the sta-tion names, it also contains the respective pro-gramme types. The station currently tuned to is highlighted in colour.3. Select a station.Tuning to stations via a station searchûStart a search by pressing the arrow buttons p and o.The search stops at the next station in the waveband.
TUNER 23Tuning to stations by entering the frequency directly1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is displayed.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Manual tune”.The input menu is opened. The frequency of the current station is displayed.4. Tune to the frequency using one of the follow-ing options:– Entering it directly by touching the number buttons.- or - – Tuning to the next station from the station list by touching the symbols and on the display.- or - – Tuning to the next station from the station list by touching the stations shown on the left and right on the display.- or - – Turning the rotary knob q to change the frequency upwards or downwards.As soon as a valid frequency is input, it is tuned to. Tuning to stations by scanningIf you activate this function, each station found within the frequency range will be played for ap-prox. 5 seconds.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want is highlighted.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Start scan”.Each station within the frequency range is played for approx. 5 seconds.4. Select “Stop scan” to tune to the scanned sta-tion.Storing stations on station buttons in the preset memoriesSetting the preset memoryThere are six memory locations available in each of the preset memories. The preset memories for radio mode are:– In FM mode:FM 1, FM 2, FM 3, BEST FM and MIXED.–In AM mode:AM 1, AM 2, AM 3 and MIXED.The PCM automatically fills the station buttons for the Best FM preset memory at regular in-tervals with the stations with the strongest re-ception. In contrast to all other preset memories, the MIXED preset memory can store stations from different modes. This means you can store stations from FM mode and AM mode as well as stations from TV mode here.
24 TUNER1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-ed.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Preset memory”.The available preset memories are listed.4. Select the preset memory you want.5. Tou ch th e m tab in the header again.If you briefly touch the preset memory dis-played in the main menu, you will likewise switch to another preset memory.Choosing a station in the station list and storing it1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is displayed.2. Select “Station list”.3. Select the station entry you want by pressing and holding it for several seconds.The station buttons are displayed and the sta-tion previously chosen is shown in the informa-tion window.4. To store the station on a station button, select the station button you want.The station list is displayed again.Storing via an automatic station search (autostore)The automatic station search is only available for the preset memories FM 1, FM 2, FM 3 as well as AM 1, AM 2 and AM 3.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-ed.2. Set the preset memory if applicable (> page 23).3. Press and hold the “Autostore” menu item.The search is activated. It stores the six sta-tions with the strongest reception and tunes to the strongest station.Storing stations manually1. Press the m button repeatedly until the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlight-ed.2. Tune to the station (> page 22).3. Set the preset memory if applicable (> page 23).4. Press and hold the station button for a few sec-onds.As soon as the station is stored on the station button, the station name or the station frequen-cy is displayed on the button and you hear a signal tone.Traffic programme (TP)Various FM radio stations broadcast traffic mes-sages in addition to their radio programmes.The broadcasting stations are responsible for the quality of these traffic messages. For that reason, no liability can be accepted for the completeness and correctness of the information.Traffic messages are part of the RDS signals and are not available everywhere. To find out more, please refer also to the sections “Switching RDS on/off” on page 25 and “Displaying traffic mes-sages (TMC)” on page 109.Switching the traffic programme on1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Select “Traffic prog.” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.When the traffic programme is switched on, the abbreviation TP (Traffic Programme) is dis-played in the bottom line and you hear the traf-fic messages regardless of the audio source that is currently active.
TUNER 25Setting the Traffic prog. volume The traffic programme volume refers to the vol-ume at which the traffic programme announce-ments are output.It specifies the minimum volume as a function of the volume of the audio source currently selected. 1. Press the b button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Traffic prog.”.4. Make the setting you want on the scale by touching the two symbols and .Making settings for radio modeSwitching RDS on/offThe PCM is capable of receiving RDS signals (RDS = Radio Data System) in FM mode. It supports the following functions: – station name, – programme type (PTY), – traffic programme, – radio text as well as – detection of alternative frequencies. (Radio stations transmit programmes with the same programme content on different frequen-cies in different regions.)You can switch tracking of these alternative fre-quencies on or off in the Set menu.1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET FM”.4. Select “RDS” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Switching regionalisation on/offWhen RDS (tracking of the alternative frequencies) is active, regionalisation can additionally be switched on or off. If stations have a station chain with varying region-al programme contents, switching on regionalisa-tion prevents switching between the different sta-tions.1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET FM”.4. Select “Regional” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Switching RDS radio text on/off1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET FM”.4. Select “Radio text” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
26 TUNERChoosing a PTY (programme type) filter RDS stations can broadcast the station’s pro-gramme type (PTY). The programme type allows stations to be classi-fied based on their genre, for example “pop”, “rock” or “news”.If a programme type is selected, only stations that correspond to the selected programme type are displayed in the FM station list.You can select as many different programme types in a list as you wish.1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET FM”>“PTY filter”.4. Select the programme types you want for sort-ing ( ) or deselect those you wish to omit ( ).By selecting “Activate all” you can select ( ) or deselect ( ) all the programme types in the list.Setting sorting criteria for the FM station listThe FM station list can be sorted according to var-ious criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:1. Press the m button repeatedly until “FM” is highlighted. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET FM”.4. Select “Sorting criteria”.Various radio buttons are then available for you to select:–Alphabetical: The station list is sorted alpha-betically.–Genre (PTY): The station list is sorted ac-cording to programme type (PTY).If a programme type is selected, only sta-tions that correspond to the selected pro-gramme type are displayed in the FM station list. Only after selecting “Activate all” in the PTY filter list are all stations that can be re-ceived listed.–Station strength: The station list is displayed sorted according to station strength. Sta-tions with good reception are shown at the top of the list.–Last stations: The station list shows the sta-tions listened to for at least two minutes. The last station listened to is shown at the top of the list.–Frequency: The station list is displayed sort-ed according to the order of the stations in the frequency band.5. Set the sorting option you want by selecting it.
TUNER 27TVThe standard TV on the PCM can receive non-en-crypted terrestrial analogue and digital (DVB-T) programmes. Depending on the country and re-ception area, only analogue, digital or a mixture of analogue and digital programmes may be availa-ble. If a programme is simultaneously received in both analogue and digital forms, the TV tuner au-tomatically selects the higher-quality of the two. In some areas, DVB-T programmes are also broad-cast without picture content. These are character-ised by an additional note symbol.The activation of the automatic hatchback as well as some other vehicle functions may spo-radic cause temporary restrictions of the TV reception.Calling up the main menu for TV modeûPress the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.To use TV mode, you must first tune to a TV sta-tion. You can do this via a station search or using the TV menu.You can return from the TV picture of the cur-rent station to the main menu for TV mode at any time by touching the display or pressing the Back button h.Tuning to TV stationsDisplaying the TV picture1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.2. Touch the information area in the TV menu (above the station buttons on the display).The TV picture of the TV station currently tuned to is shown.Tuning to stations using the station buttonsStation buttons must already have TV stations stored before they can be used to tune to a sta-tion. To find out more, please refer to the section “Storing TV stations” on page 28.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.2. Briefly press the station button.The station is tuned to and its TV picture dis-played. An information window appears for about 3 seconds. WARNING!Accident hazard. For your own safety, no TV picture or video text can be shown during driv-ing for legal reasons.ûTo receive a TV picture, the vehicle must be stopped.ûIn some countries, the parking brake must also be engaged.
28 TUNERTuning to stations using the station listThe station list provides details of the stations that can currently be received.Depending on the setting, the station list is ar-ranged alphabetically, based on reception quality or based on the last stations. To find out more, please refer to the section “Making settings for TV mode” on page 31.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.2. Select “Station list”.3. Select the TV station or the DVB-T radio station you want.The station is tuned to and its TV picture dis-played. The digital programmes can also be selected using the EPG list. To find out more, please refer to the section “Electronic Programme Guide” on page 30.Storing TV stationsEach of the preset memories, TV 1, TV 2, TV 3 and MIXED, has six memory locations available.In contrast to all other preset memories, the MIXED preset memory can store stations from dif-ferent modes. Here, you can manually store sta-tions from FM/AM mode as well as stations from TV mode.Storing stations manually1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.2. Tune to a TV station (> page 27).3. Press and hold the station button for a few sec-onds.As soon as the TV station is stored on the sta-tion button, the station name is shown on the button.Storing via an automatic station searchThe automatic station search is only available for the preset memories TV 1, TV 2 and TV 3.1. Set “TV” mode.2. If necessary, set the preset memory as fol-lows:a.Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.b.Select “Preset memory”.The available preset memories are listed.c.Select the preset memory you want.d.Touch the m tab in the header again.You can likewise change the preset memory by touching “TV 1”, etc. in the TV main menu.3. The set preset memory now appears after the “Autostore” menu item.Select the menu item.The search starts. It stores the six pro-grammes with the strongest reception and switches to the strongest programme.
TUNER 29Showing the information windowûPress the right rotary knob r while in TV mode.The information window is called up together with the “Station list” menu item.While for digital programmes it shows details about the programme currently active, for ana-logue programmes the information window only contains the name of the station plus the current time.The various information can, however, only be displayed if the relevant signal is being broad-cast by the station.Video text Calling up video text1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Video text”.The video text display appears. When called up for the first time, the programme page “100” is shown.Not all stations transmit a video text signal.Selecting a video text page1. Touching the display opens a bar for entering the numbers directly.2. Touch the appropriate digits on the display.After the third digit is entered, the video text search begins and the video text page is shown. The bar for entering numbers is hid-den.If the “Video text via TV” function is activated, the video text picture is overlaid onto that of the TV programme. To find out more, please refer to the section “Placing video text over the TV picture” on page 30.Zooming into a video text pageûCall up an enlarged view of the upper half of the display by turning the right rotary knob q.Turn the knob again to switch to an enlarged view of the lower half of the display.ûTurn once more to return to the normal page view.
30 TUNERPlacing video text over the TV pictureIf you activate this function, the video text page is overlaid transparently over the picture of the cur-rent TV programme.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV”.4. Select “Video text via TV” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function. Electronic Programme GuideThe PCM features an Electronic Programme Guide, which contains various information about the digital programmes. The programmes are list-ed in chronological order.Information (station, progress bar, end time and name of current programme) about programmes that are currently playing is shown at the top of the list. This is followed by information (station, start/end time, names of following episodes) for the subsequent programmes. Please note that only digital channels transmit EPG data. This service is not available for ana-logue channels.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “EPG list”.The Electronic Programme Guide appears.Selecting an entry in the EPG list tunes to the corresponding programme and shows its TV picture.The menu item is greyed out if no EPG data is being received.You can also view the EPG data available for the current programme in the d menu by selecting the “Details TV” menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section “Display-ing detailed information about the active audio source” on page 111.
TUNER 31Making settings for TV modeSetting sorting of the station listThe TV station list can be sorted according to var-ious criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:–Alphabetical: When sorted alphabetically, DVB-T TV stations are shown first, followed by analogue TV stations. DVB-T radio stations are at the bottom of the list. –Station strength: When sorted based on sta-tion strength, the stations are listed in de-scending order of reception quality.–Last stations: The station list shows the sta-tions tuned to for at least two minutes. Sta-tions that cannot be received are not dis-played.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Sorting criteria”.4. Select the sorting you want.Setting the reception country Information about the available channel range is stored for the PCM in the country setting.If you take your vehicle abroad and wish to use the TV tuner, you should first set the correct entry in the country list.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Reception country”.The country list is opened. It is sorted alpha-betically. If the correct region is not available in the list, you can choose a setting with a symbol representing the correct TV stand-ard.A complete list of the reception countries can be found in the section “Affiliated countries for TV tuner country settings” on page 203.Setting TV picture parameters Setting the Brightness1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Picture param. - TV” >“Brightness”.4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .
32 TUNERSetting the Contrast1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Picture param. - TV” >“Contrast”.4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .Setting the Colour1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Picture param. - TV” >“Colour”.4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .Setting the Format1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Picture param. - TV” >“Format”.The following options are then available for you to select:–“Automatic”The picture format being received by the TV tuner is evaluated and its on-screen display is adjusted accordingly (automatic format switching between 4:3 and 16:9).–“4:3” The picture is shown in such a way that no image contents are lost.–“16:9”The picture is expanded to cover the entire width of the display. The picture is cropped at the upper and lower edges of the display.This setting is particularly useful for pro-grammes that are broadcast with a black border at the upper and lower edges of the display.4. Select the setting you want.With the Automatic setting, an ID broadcast by the station in question is analysed. Some stations do not broadcast this ID cor-rectly, with the result that the PCM cannot im-plement format settings automatically.Under certain circumstances, poor reception can lead to the ID not being analysed properly. In such cases, please set a fixed format (4:3 or 16:9).Setting the tint (special feature of NTSC stations) The Tint display option is additionally available when receiving signals from NTSC stations (National Television System Committee: colour TV standard in the USA and Japan, amongst other countries). This allows colour distortions related to transmission to be corrected.1. Press the m button repeatedly until the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET TV” >“Picture param. - TV” >“Tint”.4. Make the setting you want by touching the two symbols and .
DISC 33DISCLoading and ejecting CDs/DVDs ..................36Calling up the main menu for CD/DVD mode ...........................................37Selecting a CD/DVD....................................37Selecting a track ........................................37Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)..................37Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode ........38Setting the audio format for video DVD ........38Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio) ................38Naming a CD..............................................38Skipping to the previous/next track..............39Fast forward/reverse ..................................39Repeating a track .......................................39Switching the shuffle function on/off ............39Starting/stopping scanning .........................39Searching for music in MP3 mode (full text search)..........................................39iPod* ..........................................................40Calling up the main menu for iPod mode.......40Searching for music....................................40Playlists .....................................................41Track list ...................................................42Skipping to the previous/next track..............42Fast forward/reverse ..................................42Repeating a track .......................................42Switching the shuffle function on/off ............42Adapting the volume for iPod mode..............42USB ............................................................ 43Calling up the main menu for USB mode ...... 44Searching for a track ................................. 44Track list................................................... 46Skipping to the previous/next track............. 46Fast forward/reverse ................................. 46Repeating a track ...................................... 46Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 46Starting/stopping scanning......................... 46Calling up an external audio source ............. 47Activating the interface............................... 47Adapting the volume for an external audio source ............................................. 47External Bluetooth® audio source.................. 48Calling up an external Bluetooth® audiosource/starting playback............................ 48Activating the interface............................... 48Skipping a track ........................................ 49Fast forward/reverse ................................. 49Repeating a track ...................................... 49Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 49Starting/stopping scanning......................... 49Bluetooth® settings...................................... 49Calling up Bluetooth® settings .................... 49Switching Bluetooth® on/off ....................... 49Adding a new Bluetooth® device ................. 50Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device......................... 50Setting visibility ........................................ 50Authorised Bluetooth® devices .................. 50
34 DISCDISCCD audio/DVD-Audio/DVD-Video Notes on copyrightYou are only permitted to create copies of CDs/DVDs for your own private use. The copyright ex-ceptions do not cover circulation of the duplicated CDs/DVDs to third parties.The music tracks that you can create for and play in MP3 mode are generally copyright-protected under the applicable international and national laws. In many countries, the reproduction of copy-righted material is not permitted, even if only for personal use, without the express prior consent of the copyright holder. Please check the current copyright laws for your country and comply with them. These restrictions do not apply, for example, to your own compositions and re-cordings or to recordings for which authorisation has been obtained from the copyright holder.The most current laws always apply!Notes on the media supportedTo avoid problems when playing your CDs/DVDs, please note the following:– Permissible media:CD-R and CD-RW (650 MB and 700 MB)DVD+R and DVD+RWDVD-R and DVD-RW– Permissible file systems:CD-ROM (Yellow Book)/ISO 9660 Level 1/Joliet for CD (filenames max. 64 characters)– Permissible file structures:The maximum number of tracks per disc is 4,000.A disc may hold a maximum of 2,000 folders in total.Each folder in turn may contain a maximum of 1,000 tracks.The maximum directory depth is 11 levels.CAUTIONûAlways touch the CD/DVD at the edges on-ly. Never touch the side without writing and keep the CD/DVD clean.ûNever stick anything on the CD/DVD.ûProtect the CD/DVD against direct sunlight and from heat sources such as heaters, etc. ûBefore playing the CD/DVD, it should be cleaned with a special, commercially avail-able cleaning cloth, wiping from the centre outwards. Solvents such as petrol, thinners or other commercially available cleaning agents and anti-static sprays must not be used.ûDo not bend the CD/DVD.The system may not be able to play copy-protected CDs/DVDs or CDs with CD-ROM sections that do not correspond to the audio CD standard.
DISC 35No warranty is accepted for:– poor quality user-burned CDs/DVDs,– CDs of other formats,–Mixed Mode CDs,– CD-Extra CDs as well as– multi-session CDs/DVDs.CDs/DVDs that have not been finalised cannot be played.Insertion of a non-standard CD/DVD format such as DVD-Plus (one side audio CD, the other side DVD) may lead to irreparable damage of the drive due to the greater thickness of the media.Supported audio formatsThe PCM supports the following audio formats:*) No guarantee can be made that all MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV formats can be played back, due to the wide variety of different audio programmes (encoders) available.**) Manufactured under licence in accordance with US patents No. 5.451.942, 5.956.674, 5.974.380, 5.978.762, 6.487.535 and other patents issued and registered in the USA and inter-nationally. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are reg-istered trademarks and the DTS logos and the DTS symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.***) The double D symbol is a legally protected trademark of Dolby Laboratories.****) MLP LosslessTH is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.Notes on DVD modeVideo DVDs generally feature a regional code. In-formation on this can usually be found either on the DVD itself or on the DVD sleeve.The CD/DVD drive of the PCM detects the respec-tive regional code of the video DVD inserted. As per the “Regional Protection Code”, it allows you to change the regional code up to five times. Please contact your Porsche partner to find out how to change the regional code.You will find a list of regional codes in the section “Regional codes for video DVDs” on page 203.When playing video DVDs, only playback of the au-dio information is supported.Some of the video DVDs you find in stores may not conform to the standards. You may experience sound or other playback problems with these DVDs.Discs, DVD authoring software, burning software and burners are widely available. Due to this wide variety, we cannot guarantee that the CD/DVD drive of the PCM will be able to play every user-burned video DVD.MP3 *(MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)WMA *(Windows Media Audio)AAC-LC *(Low Complexity Advanced Audio Coding)WAVE file format *DTS **(Digital Theater Systems) Dolby® Digital ***Meridian Lossless Packing ****
36 DISCLoading and ejecting CDs/DVDsLoading a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD driveûInsert the disc into the CD/DVD slot with the printed side facing upwards.Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. Ejecting a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD driveûBriefly press the j button.The CD/DVD is stopped and ejected.The system automatically switches to the current audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have removed the CD/DVD from the magazine com-partment.Calling up the CD/DVD changer menuûBriefly press the j button.The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed. A but-ton is displayed for each compartment in the changer magazine.If there is a CD or DVD in the compartment, you will see the title of the CD/DVD on the button (if available).If the title of the CD/DVD is not available, the for-mat of the disc (CD or DVD) is indicated instead.If a compartment is empty, “empty” is shown be-side the compartment number on the display.Loading a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD changer Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. To allow for the fastest possible changes, you should load the magazine successively beginning with compartment 1.1. Briefly press the j button.The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed.2. Select an empty magazine compartment. You are then prompted to insert a disc.3. Push the CD/DVD into the slot.The printed side of the CD/DVD must face up-wards. Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played. “DISC” flashes on the button. As soon as the CD/DVD is detected, it is scanned and the current track is shown on the display.Loading all discs in a PCM with emptyCD/DVD changer ûPress and hold the j button or any mag-azine compartment for several seconds.All magazine compartments are moved into position one after the other and at each stage you are prompted to insert a CD/DVD.Ejecting a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD changer 1. Briefly press the j button.The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed.2. Select the magazine compartment you want.The CD/DVD is stopped if necessary and eject-ed.
DISC 373. Remove the CD/DVD.If you do not insert another CD/DVD in this magazine compartment, the CD/DVD in the next occupied compartment is played.If you do not remove the CD/DVD from the slot, the PCM will automatically retract it after a short while.Ejecting all discs in a PCM with CD/DVD changer ûPress and hold the j button or any mag-azine compartment for several seconds.All discs are ejected in sequence.The system automatically switches to the current audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have removed the last CD/DVD from the magazine compartment.Calling up the main menu for CD/DVD modeûPress the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.Selecting a CD/DVD1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Disc selection”.A list of the available CDs/DVDs is opened.3. Select the CD/DVD you want.Playback is started at the beginning of the disc.Selecting a trackYou can select a track directly using the track list. The track list shows the track numbers and, if available, the track names.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.3. Select the track you want.Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/DVD, the track list shows the names of the root directories as well as the subdirectories.The following symbols are used in the track list to make it easier for you to navigate within the direc-tory structure of the MP3 CD/DVD:–Subdirectory Selecting this list entry opens the correspond-ing subdirectory and displays the directories and tracks it contains.– Higher-level directory Selecting this list entry or pressing the h button displays the higher-level di-rectory.– Playlist Selecting this list entry allows you to play lists of tracks in m3u format you have created on your computer and burned to the CD/DVD.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.3. Select the directory or playlist you want.4. Select the track you want.
38 DISCIf the directory structure of the folders is very deep or the number of files is very large, it may not be possible to display all the folders or tracks.File formats that cannot be played will not be displayed.To find out more, please refer also to the sec-tion “Notes on the media supported” on page 34.Selecting a chapter in video DVD modeWhen playing video DVDs, only playback of the au-dio information is supported.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.3. Select the chapter you want. - or if you want to choose a chapter in another film title - 3Select the first list entry with the “higher-level directory” symbol .The list of video titles is opened.4. Select the video title you want.5. Select the chapter you want.Setting the audio format for video DVD 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “DVD audio format”.A list of the available audio formats is opened.4. Select the audio format you want.After selecting a new audio format from the list, playback is resumed at the same point in the current chapter if possible. If this is not possible, the current chapter is played once again from the beginning.All following tracks are also played with the newly set audio format. If this is not possible with a track, playback reverts to the originally set audio format. This format is then retained for the subsequent tracks.Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio) 1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.3. Select the first list entry with the “higher-level directory” symbol .The list of audio groups is opened.4. Select the audio group you want.5. Select the track you want within the audio group.Naming a CDThis function is only available for audio CDs and DTS-CDs without CD text.A maximum of 100 CDs can be named.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Name CD”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want for the CD.
DISC 39Skipping to the previous/next trackIf the current track has been playing for longer than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes playback from the start of the current track. If the current track has not yet been playing for 10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start of the previous track.ûIf you want to skip to the next track when a CD/DVD is playing, briefly press the o button.ûIf you want to skip back to the start of the track when a CD/DVD is playing, briefly press the p button.Fast forward/reverseûPress and hold the o button or p button for a few seconds when a CD/DVD is playing until the position you want is reached.Repeating a trackActivating this function repeats the current track or chapter (video DVD mode).ûSelect “Repeat” while a CD/DVD is playing to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.- or to switch it off - ûPress the p or o button.Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. The current CD/DVD is then played in random order.ûSelect “Shuffle” while a CD/DVD is playing to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Starting/stopping scanningWhen this function is activated, each track on the CD/DVD or each chapter on a video DVD is played for approx. 10 seconds.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line. 2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.The CD/DVD track that has started playing will continue to play.The function is automatically stopped as soon as a track is selected directly in the track list.Searching for music in MP3 mode (full text search)The music search in MP3 mode is based on a full text search of the file names.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Full text search”.The input menu is opened.The menu item is only available when the track list is available.4. Enter at least three letters of the search term.5. Call up the search results by selecting “List”.6. Select the track you want in the result list.The track is played.
40 DISCiPod* You can connect one of the following iPod models with your PCM via a jack in the centre console of your vehicle using the connecting cable supplied:–iPod 4th generation,– iPod 5th generation (video),– iPod nano,– iPod nano 2nd generation as well as –iPod mini,– iPod photo,– later iPod models**. *) iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. and is registered in the USA and in other countries.**) Compatibility of later iPod models with the PCM cannot be guaranteed.If you encounter any problems it may be nec-essary to update your iPod’s firmware.It is recommended not to leave an iPod in the vehicle for long periods of time as extreme ambient conditions (temperature, humidity) can occur in vehicles.The iPod charges during use.For proper operation of an iPod or iPhone on the PCM, including the charging function, both connectors must be attached to the media in-terface.Calling up the main menu for iPod modeûPress the n button repeatedly until the “iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.The “iPod” mode is only displayed if a corre-sponding device is connected to the inter-face.Searching for musicYou can search for specific tracks on your iPod. The following categories are available to you for this:–ArtistsDisplays a list of all available artists. If you se-lect an artist from the list, the number of tracks and albums available for the subsequent search is updated and displayed after the menu item.iPod jack
DISC 41–AlbumsDisplays a list of the available albums. If you have already selected an artist, only albums by that artist will be available for the subsequent search.If you select an album from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated.–TrackDisplays a list of all tracks stored on the iPod. If you have already selected a category (e.g. “Artists”), the list of tracks will have been automatically updated and only tracks by that artist will be available.– Music genresThe tracks stored on the iPod are generally as-signed to a music genre (provided the “Genre” ID3 tag has been assigned). These music gen-res can also be used as categories for a search.If you have selected a music genre, the artists, albums and tracks available for the subse-quent search are updated.Once you select a category, higher-level catego-ries are no longer available. After you select an artist, for example, the “Music genres” category can no longer be selected.Selecting “Start playback” ends the search and plays the tracks in accordance with your previous selection. Below is an example of how to perform a search for the tracks of a specific artist and album.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Find music” in iPod mode.3. Select “Artists”. A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored on the iPod is opened. 4. Select the artist you want in the list.5. Select “Albums”.A list of all the albums by the selected artist stored on the iPod is opened.6. Select the album you want in the list.The number of tracks on this album is now shown in brackets on the “Track” button.7. Select “Start playback”.The tracks on the selected album are now played one after the other.The tracks from a music search are displayed in the track list. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Track list” on page 42.The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.PlaylistsSelecting this list entry allows you to play lists of tracks you have stored on your iPod.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Playlists”.The menu is opened.3. Select the playlist you want.The tracks in the list are played one after the other. After the last track is played, the playlist is automatically repeated.
42 DISCTrack listIf you have performed a music search or selected a playlist, the corresponding tracks are displayed in the track list. The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.The menu is opened.3. Select the track you want.The track is played.Skipping to the previous/next trackûIf you want to skip to the next track when the iPod is playing, briefly press the o button.ûIf you want to skip back to the start of the track when the iPod is playing, briefly press the p button.Fast forward/reverseûPress the o button or p button when the iPod is playing until the position you want is reached.Repeating a trackActivating this function repeats the current track.ûSelect “Repeat” when the iPod is playing to ac-tivate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.- or to switch it off - ûPress the p or o button.Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen you activate this function, the current track in the music selection is played to the end. All tracks in the current music selection are then played in random order.ûSelect “Shuffle” when the iPod is playing to ac-tivate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Adapting the volume for iPod modeYou will only be able to access the “SET DISC / AUX” menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available.1. Press the n button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET DISC / AUX” >“Volume adaptation” >“Volume iPod”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting the symbols and or by turning q the right rotary knob.
DISC 43USBYou can connect a USB memory stick or a USB MP3 player containing audio files to the USB inter-face of the PCM in the centre console.You can use it to:– play audio data from your USB stick (permitted formats: MP3, WAV, WMA and AAC-LC),– download data from the Sport display as well as– download data from the PCM logbook.You cannot connect USB devices that require the installation of special drivers. The use of a USB hub is not permitted.Compatibility with all memory sticks and MP3 players cannot be guaranteed due to the rap-id rate at which USB media are developing.USB devices with increased power require-ments (e.g. external hard drives) cannot be operated on the USB interface in some cir-cumstances.It is recommended not to leave USB devices in the vehicle for long periods of time as ex-treme ambient conditions (temperature, hu-midity) can occur in vehicles. Notes on the media supportedTo avoid problems when playing your USB devic-es, please note the following:– Permissible media:USB mass storage device,USB MP3 player (to MTP standard) – Permissible file systems:USB devices with the file systems FAT 16 and FAT 32 are supported.– Permissible USB standards:USB devices that meet the USB 2.0 specifica-tions are supported.– Permissible file structures:Up to 10,000 tracks are supported on the USB device.USB jack
44 DISCCalling up the main menu for USB modeûPress the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.The “USB” mode is only displayed if a corre-sponding device is connected to the inter-face.The first time USB mode is activated, the au-dio files in the USB memory are loaded. The menu cannot be used and the menu items are greyed out during this process. Playback be-gins as soon as the first tracks are found on the USB device.Searching for a trackYou can search for specific tracks on your USB de-vice. The following options are available to you for this:– search for tracks using categories (“Find music”),– search for similar tracks to the track currently playing using categories (“Play more from”)and– search for tracks using a “Full text search”.The music search only works if metadata for the tracks (ID3 tags) is available.A database is created in the PCM for the mu-sic search. This can take a few minutes.The tracks from a music search are compiled in a playlist named “Tracks from music search” under the “Track list” menu item.Searching for tracks by categoryYou can compile the tracks you want using the fol-lowing categories:–ArtistDisplays a list of all artists. If you select an art-ist from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated.If you select “All artists” you can also search using the input menu.–AlbumDisplays a list of the available albums. If you have already selected a category (e.g. “Artists”), only albums by that artist will be available for the subsequent search.If you select an album from the list, the number of tracks available for the subsequent search is updated.If you select “All albums” you can also search using the input menu.–TrackDisplays a list of all tracks stored on the USB device. If you have already selected a category (e.g. “Artists”), the list of tracks will have been automatically updated and only tracks by that artist will be available.If you select “All tracks” you can also search using the input menu.–Music genresThe tracks stored on the USB device are gen-erally assigned to a music genre (provided the “Genre” ID3 tag has been assigned). These music genres can also be used as categories for a search.
DISC 45These categories can be used either individually or in succession for the search. The remaining number of entries is updated.In contrast to the music search in iPod mode, the categories can be set in any order.Selecting “Start playback” ends the search and plays the tracks in accordance with your previous selection.Below is an example of how to perform a search for tracks by a specific artist on a specific album.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Find music” in USB mode.3. Select “Artists”. A list of all available artists whose tracks are stored on the USB device is opened. Highlight the artist you want by selecting in the list.4. Select the artist you want in the list.5. Select “Albums”.A list of all albums by the selected artist stored on the USB device is opened.6. Select the album you want in the list.The number of tracks on this album is now shown in brackets on the “Track” button.7. Select “Start playback”.The tracks on the selected album are now played one after the other.Searching for similar tracks by category1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Play more from”.You can now choose between the following cat-egories:–“Artist”,–“Album” and–“Genre”.4. Select the category you want.The corresponding tracks are played one after the other. In some cases, no further tracks may be found for the selected category.Searching for tracks using a full text searchThe full text search function gives you quick ac-cess to specific tracks. It is suitable for the follow-ing situations:– there is no metadata (ID3 tags) on your USB device,– there are a large number of tracks stored on your USB device and a search using filters would produce very long result lists or– you do not know the exact name of the track/artist you want.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Full text search”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter at least three letters of the search term.5. Call up the search results by selecting “List”.In the result list, symbols are used to distinguish between an artist, track or album:6. Select the artist/album/track you want in the result list.The selection is played.ArtistAlbumTrack
46 DISCTrack listThe tracks and playlists stored on the USB device are displayed in alphabetical order in the track list.To find out more about using the track list, please refer to the section “Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)” on page 37.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Track list”.The menu is opened.3. Select the track you want.The track is played.- or - Select the playlist and then the track you want.The track is played.If the directory structure of the folders is very deep or the number of files is very large, it may not be possible to display all of the fold-ers or tracks.File formats that cannot be played will not be displayed.Skipping to the previous/next trackIf the current track has been playing for longer than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes playback from the start of the current track. If the current track has not yet been playing for 10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start of the previous track.ûIf you want to skip to the next track in USB mode, briefly press the o button.ûIf you want to skip back to the start of the track in USB mode, briefly press the p button.Fast forward/reverseûPress the o button or p button in USB mode un-til the position you want is reached.Repeating a trackActivating this function repeats the current track.ûSelect “Repeat” in USB mode to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.- or to switch it off - ûPress the p or o button.Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. All tracks in the current music selection are then played in random order.ûSelect “Shuffle” in USB mode to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.The shuffle function is automatically deactivated as soon as a new music search is started.Starting/stopping scanningWhen this function is activated, each track from the USB device or the current music selection is played for approx. 10 seconds.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “USB” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.The track on the USB device that has started playing continues to be played.The function is automatically stopped as soon as a track is selected directly in the track list or a mu-sic search is performed.
DISC 47External audio sourceYou can use the AUX interface to connect an exter-nal audio source that is operated on the source it-self rather than on the PCM. Please refer to the op-erating manual for the relevant device.Calling up an external audio sourceûPress the n button repeatedly until the “AUX” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.Activating the interfaceTo be able to select a connected external audio source with the n button, the interface must be activated in the SET menu.1. Press the n button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”.You will only be able to access the “SET DISC / AUX” menu if there is at least one CD/DVD in-serted or at least one audio source activated ( ) in the menu.4. Select “AUX” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Adapting the volume for an external audio sourceVolume control should mainly be performed on the external audio source to avoid large dif-ferences in volume (particularly increases) when changing the audio source.Recommendation:ûSet the maximum volume on the external audio source.ûThen set the volume you want on the PCM.You can also adapt the volume of the external audio source to the volume of the PCM.AUX jackWARNING!Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle.ûOperate the external audio source only when you are safely in control of your vehi-cle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the external audio source while the vehicle is parked.
48 DISCYou will only be able to access the “SET DISC / AUX” menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available.1. Press the n button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET DISC / AUX” >“Volume adaptation” >“Volume AUX”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting the symbols and or by turning q the right rotary knob.External Bluetooth® audio sourceYou can also connect an external audio source that is partially operated on the source itself rath-er than on the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection.For the connection and operation of the exter-nal Bluetooth® audio source, the PCM also supports the A2DP/AVRCP profile.The extent to which the external Bluetooth® audio source can be operated on the PCM de-pends on the functions supported by the au-dio source. Operation of the external Blue-tooth® audio source on the PCM is therefore restricted in some cases. In other cases, op-eration on the PCM is not possible. The audio source is then operated on the connected de-vice itself. Please refer to the operating man-ual for the relevant device.Calling up an external Bluetooth® audio source/starting playbackûPress the n button repeatedly until the “AUX BT” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.Playback starts automatically if this is support-ed by the Bluetooth® device. It may be neces-sary to start playback manually on the Blue-tooth® device.The “AUX BT” mode is only displayed if a cor-responding device is connected to the inter-face.Activating the interfaceTo use an external Bluetooth® audio source, the AUX Bluetooth function must be activated in the “SET DISC / AUX” menu.1. Press the n button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”.You will only be able to access the “SET DISC / AUX” menu if there is at least one CD/DVD in-serted or at least one audio source activated ( ) in the menu.4. Select “AUX Bluetooth” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.When you deactivate “AUX Bluetooth”, the Bluetooth® devices are deleted from the list if necessary.WARNING!Accident hazard. Distraction could result in you losing control of the vehicle.ûOperate the external audio source only when you are safely in control of your vehi-cle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the external audio source while the vehicle is parked.
DISC 49With some devices, it may be necessary to set the volume on the device.Recommendation:ûSet the required volume on the external Bluetooth® audio source.ûThen set the volume you want on the PCM.The functions and displays depend on the ac-tive Bluetooth® device.Skipping a trackûIf you want to skip to the next track, briefly press the o button.ûIf you want to skip back to the start of the track/to the previous track, briefly press the p button.Fast forward/reverseûPress the o button or p button in AUX BT mode until the position you want is reached.Repeating a trackActivating this function repeats the current track.ûSelect “Repeat” in Bluetooth® AUX mode to ac-tivate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.- or to switch it off - ûPress the p or o button.Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen you activate this function, the current track is played to the end. All tracks are then played in random order.ûSelect “Shuffle” in Bluetooth® AUX mode to ac-tivate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Starting/stopping scanningWhen this function is activated, each track from the external audio source is played for approx. 10 seconds.1. Press the n button repeatedly until the “AUX BT” audio source is highlighted in the bot-tom line.2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.The track from the external audio source that has started playing will continue to play.Bluetooth® settingsCalling up Bluetooth® settings1. Press the n button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET DISC / AUX” >“Bluetooth settings”. You will only be able to access the “SET DISC / AUX” menu if there is at least one audio source from the DISC area available.Switching Bluetooth® on/offSwitching Bluetooth® onûSelect “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Switching Bluetooth® off ûSelect “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.
50 DISCAdding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”.1. Select “New MP3 player” in the Bluetooth® settings.A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceTo find out more, please refer to the section “Es-tablishing a connection from an external Blue-tooth® device” on page 69.Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section “Set-ting visibility” on page 69.Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-ised MP3 players .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devicesûSelect “List of MP3 players” in the Bluetooth® settings.Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCM1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Connect”.Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth® device from the PCM1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Disconnect”.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.
DISC 51Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,–the Bluetooth® address as well as– the supported services.
52 PHONEPHONEBluetooth®................................................. 54Prerequisites for the mobile phone ..............55Hands-free quality.......................................55Interruptions to the connection while driving . 55Switching Bluetooth® on/off........................56Operating the Bluetooth® hands-free unit(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ....56Authorising a mobile phone ......................... 56Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device.......................... 57Conducting calls......................................... 58Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone ...............................58Accepting a call ......................................... 58Ending a call ..............................................59Rejecting a call...........................................59Dialling a number ....................................... 60Using the quick dial (redial) function ............. 60Using the direct dial function .......................60Holding a call .............................................60Phonebook ................................................60List of previous calls...................................61List of received calls................................... 62Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) ................. 63Establishing an additional call ......................63Call waiting ................................................64Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........65Speed dialling ............................................ 65Telephone settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........66Setting the ringtone type.............................66Setting the ringtone volume.........................66Setting the call volume................................66Setting the microphone volume ...................66Switching 3-way calling on/off .....................66Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)........................................67Authorised Bluetooth® devices ...................67Adding a new Bluetooth® device..................68Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device..........................69Setting visibility ..........................................69Phonebook settings(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........70Setting the memory for the phonebook ........70Setting sorting ...........................................70Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook ...........................................70Transferring the phonebook...........................71Transferring the phonebook entries manually .........................................71Deleting the phonebook ..............................71Operating the PCM telephone ...................72Inserting the SIM card in the PCM ................72Entering the PIN .........................................73Conducting calls.........................................73Temporarily muting the hands-free microphone ...............................73Accepting a call .........................................74Ending a call ..............................................74Rejecting a call...........................................75Dialling a number........................................75Using the quick dial (redial) function .............75Using the direct dial function .......................75Holding a call .............................................76PCM phonebook .........................................76List of previous calls...................................78List of received calls...................................79Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................80Establishing an additional call ......................81Call waiting ................................................81Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........82Using supplementary services .....................83Making an emergency call ...........................83
PHONE 53Text messages (SMS)(with PCM telephone only).............................. 83Reading a text message ............................84Replying to a text message ......................... 84Creating and sending a new text message ...85Forwarding a text message .........................87Deleting a text message ............................ 87Reading a vCard......................................... 87Accepting vCards .......................................88Editing vCard details...................................88Discarding (deleting) vCards........................89Numbers in text messages..........................89Displaying the complete text .......................90Creating a template ....................................90Telephone settings (PCM telephone) ........................................... 91Switching the PCM telephone on/off ............91Setting ringtones........................................ 91Selecting a network....................................91Displaying the IMEI .....................................92Switching 3-way calling on/off .....................92SIM settings ..............................................92Call settings (PCM telephone) ........................................... 93Activating call forwarding ............................ 93Switching the “Call waiting” function on/off...94Switching the “Redial” function on/off...........95Setting transfer of your own number............ 95Setting automatic call answering .................95Bluetooth® settings (PCM telephone)............................................95Authorised Bluetooth® devices ...................95Adding a new Bluetooth® device..................97Setting visibility .........................................98Finding the cordless handset .......................98Phonebook settings ......................................98Setting the memory for the phonebook ........98Setting sorting ...........................................99Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook ...........................................99Transferring the phonebook ......................100Deleting the phonebook ............................100Settings for messages and data (PCM telephone)..........................................100Changing the number of the SMS service centre ..................................100Switching the SMS signal tone on/off .........100Cordless handset ........................................101Switching the cordless handset on/off .......101Charging the cordless handset ..................101General operation.....................................101Accepting a call........................................102Ending a call ............................................102Rejecting a call.........................................102Dialling a number......................................102Temporarily muting the handset microphone .................................102Establishing an additional call ....................102Call waiting (swapping) and conference ......103Phonebook...............................................104Text messages (SMS) ...............................105Settings...................................................107
54 PHONEPHONEThe PCM can be equipped with an integrated car phone (PCM telephone) as an optional accessory.This car phone (PCM telephone) is a quadband GSM radio telephone (GSM 850/900/1800/1900) with hands-free unit and a cordless hand-set. It conforms to the GSM standard (Global Sys-tem for Mobile communication) currently imple-mented in more than 100 countries. For information on the current GSM coverage and planned expansion of the coverage areas of GSM networks, contact your network provider.Your PCM also offers a facility for the connection, operation and hands-free operation of an external telephone (mobile phone) via a Bluetooth® con-nection. An alternative equipment version (Bluetooth® mo-bile phone preparation) does not include a PCM telephone, but does still allow you to use the PCM as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth® mobile phones.A list of selected compatible mobile telephones is available on the Internet at http://www.porsche.com.Bluetooth®Bluetooth® is a system for establishing radio con-nections between electronic devices within a max-imum range of 10 metres (approx. 33 feet).Bluetooth® allows you to use your mobile phone via the PCM. You can accept, make and end calls. You use your vehicle’s audio system for hands-free operation and have access to the contents of your phonebook.Access to the phonebook depends on the range of functions supported by the mobile phone used.The connection is established in different ways de-pending on the telephone version in your PCM:–In the case of a PCM with Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation, connection takes place us-ing the Hands-Free Profile. When connecting using the Hands-Free Profile, the PCM simply serves as a Bluetooth® hands-free unit for the external telephone. The SIM card of the external telephone cannot be accessed (e.g. to write a text message) and the range of functions is restricted accordingly (depending on the mobile phone used).WARNING!Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials (e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-volving explosives.Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-ple. They can interfere with technical equip-ment.ûPlease heed appropriate warnings.ûObserve statutory regulations and local re-strictions when using the telephone.
PHONE 55– In the case of a PCM with PCM telephone, connection takes place using the SIM Access Profile if this profile is supported by the mo-bile phone used. When connecting using the SIM Access Profile, the SIM card of the mobile phone is used for operation of the PCM tele-phone. The data on the SIM card (phonebook entries and text messages) is read out by the PCM and is available for use on the PCM. The range of functions for a connection using the SIM Access Profile is largely the same as the function of the PCM telephone with SIM card inserted.If the mobile phone does not support the SIM Access Profile, connection takes place using the Hands-Free Profile.With mobile phones that support both profiles, it is possible to switch between the connection types. The option of connection using the SIM Access Profile is not available on all mobile phones and must also be activated on the de-vice for some mobile phones.In some countries there may be limitations on the use of devices with Bluetooth®. Please contact the local authorities for further infor-mation.Prerequisites for the mobile phoneNot all mobile phones are equally suitable for mak-ing and receiving calls via the Bluetooth® interface of the PCM.– You need a mobile phone that supports Blue-tooth®.– The mobile phone must support the Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or higher.– The mobile phone must be switched on and Bluetooth® must be activated.– On some mobile phones, the device must also be rendered “visible” to other devices with Bluetooth®.Further information on the settings on your mobile phone can be found in the manufacturer’s operat-ing instructions.Some mobile phones have special character-istics when it comes to Bluetooth® or do not fully support Bluetooth®. Contact your mobile phone retailer and, if applicable, download the latest software onto your mobile phone.Hands-free qualityThe hands-free quality can be impaired by – having the fan on, windows open or the top down,– wind and rolling noise, – mobile phone having a poor network connec-tion, – vehicle travelling at high speed.Interruptions to the connection while drivingInterruptions to the connection may occur if:– there is inadequate GSM coverage in certain regions, – you are switching from one GSM transmitting/receiving station (GSM cell) to another and there is no voice channel available in this cell, –you are using a SIM card that is not compatible with the available network, – you are using two SIM cards and the mobile phone is simultaneously logged into the net-work with the second SIM card.
56 PHONESwitching Bluetooth® on/offSwitching Bluetooth® on1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Bluetooth settings”. 4. Select “Switch on Bluetooth”.Switching Bluetooth® off 1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”. >“Bluetooth settings”. 4. Select “Switch off Bluetooth”.Operating the Bluetooth® hands-free unit(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)The Bluetooth® hands-free unit allows you to use the PCM as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth® mo-bile phones. Please note that your mobile phone must sup-port the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile for use with the Bluetooth® hands-free unit. Authorising a mobile phoneUsing the “Find telephone” function you can have the PCM search for and authorise your mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the PCM display for this. For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”. Further details can be found in the operating man-ual for your mobile phone.
PHONE 571. Press the c button.2. Select “Find telephone”.A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.3. Select the device you want in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed, which you must enter on your mobile phone.4. Enter the displayed Bluetooth® code on the mobile phone.Successful authorisation of the device is shown on the display and the connection is es-tablished.With some mobile phones, the connection re-quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devic-es. The connection will then be established automatically in the future, without the need for further checks.Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.To find out more, please refer also to the sections “Authorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95 and “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceIf the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also start the authorisation from the mobile phone.1. If another mobile phone is connected with the PCM, switch off Bluetooth® on the connected mobile phone to disconnect the connection with the PCM.2. Press the c button.3. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.The PCM is now visible for external devices.Please ensure that the Bluetooth® visibility of the PCM is activated. To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting visibility” on page 69.4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio ac-cessories or devices that support Bluetooth®. Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions to find out how to do this.5. Select the device “PCM” from the mobile phone’s search results and establish a connec-tion.Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions to find out how to do this.6. A request appears on the PCM display. Select “Accept”.7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit Bluetooth® code of your choice and confirm with “OK”.
58 PHONE8. Enter the same Bluetooth® code on your mo-bile phone.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.9. With many mobile phones, the connection with the PCM must be explicitly established from the mobile phone following authorisation. Fur-ther details can be found in the operating man-ual for your mobile phone.With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth® code must be directly provided by the mobile phone during the connection request. If this is the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK. You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM display where you must enter the same code and confirm it.Conducting callsThere is a hands-free microphone in the roof con-trol console of the vehicle. This means that you can conduct all telephone calls without using a handset.You control the volume using the left rotary knob t.If there is a mobile phone connected to the PCM using the Hands-Free Profile, the call is normally conducted using the hands-free unit. It can, how-ever, be transferred to the mobile phone by select-ing the “Private” function.ûSelect “Private” during the call to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the “Private” function.Temporarily muting the hands-free microphoneûSelect “Mute microphone” during a call to acti-vate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.The microphone can also be muted by:– briefly pressing u the left rotary knob - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function)– pressing the left roller on the multi-function steering wheel. Accepting a call As soon as a call comes in, the current audio source is muted and the selected ringtone is played. In addition, an appropriate menu is tempo-rarily displayed or an appropriate message is shown in the bottom line.If available, the telephone number and name of the caller are displayed.
PHONE 59You can accept the incoming call in a number of ways:ûPressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “Answer” on the display.- or - ûPressing the Lift handset button l on the ex-ternal mobile phone. - or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the Lift handset button l on the multi-function steering wheel.Ending a callYou can end an active call by:ûPressing the End call button k on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “End call” in the call menu.- or - ûPressing the End call button k on the exter-nal mobile phone. - or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the End call button k on the multi-function steering wheel.Rejecting a callYou can reject an incoming call by:ûPressing the End call button k on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “Reject” in the call menu.- or - ûBriefly pressing the left rotary knob u.- or - ûPressing the End call button k on the exter-nal mobile phone. - or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the End call button k on the multi-function steering wheel.
60 PHONEDialling a number1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears.2. Select “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The input field for the telephone number is blank.3. Select the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other. 4. Select “Call number”.The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed.Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code.Using the quick dial (redial) functionPressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a list of previous calls. 1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM.2. Select the person you want to talk to.3. Select “Call number” or press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.- or - Select the first list entry, “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers opens.4. Enter the telephone number you want.5. Select “Call number”.Using the direct dial functionIf a telephone number is displayed in a menu and is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if youûpress the Lift handset button l on the PCM- or - ûtouch the displayed number for at least one second.Holding a callûYou can hold an active call by pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.The menu items “New call”, “Take call” and “End call” are then available for you to select.ûTo continue the call, press the Lift handset but-ton l on the PCM again.PhonebookAfter a Bluetooth® connection has been estab-lished between the PCM and the mobile phone, the PCM attempts to transfer the phonebook data from the mobile phone. You can prevent this auto-matic phonebook transfer by deactivating the “Au-to update” function. To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook” on page 70.Displaying the phonebook1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears.2. Select “Phonebook”.The phonebook is opened.
PHONE 61Calling a phonebook entry1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. If there is more than one number stored for this entry, select the number you want.5. Select “Call number”.The number you want is dialled.Sending a vCardYou can send phonebook entries directly as vCards. A vCard is an “electronic visiting card” that a recipient can accept directly into his or her phonebook.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. Select “Send vCard”.The list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devic-es. To do this, press “New data device” (see also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® de-vice” on page 97). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-taining the devices found is displayed. Once you have selected a device in this list, a con-nection is established and the vCard is sent.List of previous callsWhen a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-nection has been established. The last number di-alled appears at the top of the list.The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones.If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the person called is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.The list of previous calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM.Calling a number from the list of previous calls1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Call number”.Deleting a number from the list of previous callsEntries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM.Please delete the entries on your mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Delete”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The number is deleted from the list.
62 PHONEAdding to a number from the list of previous calls1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Add to number”.The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing.5. Make the change you want.6. Select “Call number”.The telephone number stored in the list is not changed.List of received callsWhen a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-nection has been established. The last call re-ceived appears at the top of the list.The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones.If the date and time information for the individ-ual calls is not transferred from the mobile phone, the list begins with the unanswered calls. These are then followed by the accept-ed calls.If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the caller is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.The list of received calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. It contains both accepted and missed calls.Calling a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number or name you want.4. If there is more than one telephone number stored for a name, select the number you want.5. Select “Call number”.Deleting a number from the list of received calls Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Delete”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.6. The number is deleted from the list.
PHONE 63Adding to a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Add to number”.The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing.5. Make the change you want.6. Select “Call number”.The telephone number stored in the list is not changed.Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones)DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be sent once a telephone connection has been estab-lished. You need this function to communicate with touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in remotely to your answering machine).Touch tone dialling1. Select “Dial number” in the call menu.The numerical input menu is opened.2. Enter the digits you want.Each digit is immediately transmitted as a DTMF tone.Combining DTMF tones with a telephone numberYou can use the + and w characters in the numer-ical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with the entry of a telephone number.Establishing an additional callYou can establish an additional call while there is another call active.Some mobile phones do not support making or accepting a second call. In this case, the “New call” menu item is greyed out during an active call.+The DTMF dialling digits are appended to the digits of the telephone number without any breaks.ûTo enter the + character, touch and hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone in-put menu.wThe digits of the telephone number are di-alled first. As soon as the connection to the telephone number dialled has been es-tablished, the DTMF dialling digits must be confirmed again.ûTo enter the w character, touch and hold the * symbol in the telephone input menu. pThe digits of the telephone number are di-alled first. The PCM then waits until the connection has been established before dialling the DTMF dialling digits.>>>The p character cannot be entered in the telephone input menu. It is, howev-er, recognised by the PCM if it is stored in a telephone number on the SIM card, for example. In this case, the behaviour of the PCM is the same as the behaviour for “+” described above.
64 PHONE1. Select “New call” in the call menu.2. You then have the following options for enter-ing the telephone number:–“Dial number”:The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. Please refer to the section “Dialling a number” on page 60.–“Phonebook”:You can insert a number stored in the phone-book. To find out more, please refer to the section “Calling a phonebook entry” on page 61.–“Previous calls”:You can insert a telephone number from the list of previous calls. To find out more, please refer to the section “Calling a number from the list of previous calls” on page 61.–“Received calls”:You can insert a telephone number from the list of received calls. To find out more, please refer to the section “Calling a number from the list of received calls” on page 62.The original call is held while the new connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or establish a conference call. To find out more, please refer to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and confer-ence” on page 65.Call waitingThe “Call waiting” function is only available if sup-ported by the network provider and by the mobile phone.The “Call waiting” function must also be activated in the call settings of the mobile phone. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference” on page 65.Rejecting a waiting callIf you receive another call while there is already one active, you will hear a call waiting tone.The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a message appears in the bottom line.ûSelect “Reject”.The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a busy signal. If the caller’s telephone number is transmitted, the number or name appears in the “Received calls” list. Accepting a waiting callûSelect “Answer”.The waiting call is accepted and activated. The previously active call is put on hold.You then have the option to switch between the two calls or to establish a conference with both callers. To find out more, please refer to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and confer-ence”.The PCM will not accept a third incoming call.The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to the mailbox.Ending a connected callûSelect “End connected call”.The currently active call is ended and the first call that is on hold is activated again.
PHONE 65Call waiting (swapping) and conferenceThe “Call waiting & conf.” function is only available if supported by the network provider and by the mobile phone. When using the Bluetooth® hands-free unit, this function is only available for a limited selection of devices.A prerequisite for this function is that there are two calls, one of which is active and one of which is on hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to the sections “Establishing an additional call” on page 63 and “Accepting a waiting call”.ûSelect “Call waiting & conf.”.You now have a number of options:Swapping between the calls (call waiting)1. Select “Swap”.The system swaps to the other call. The previ-ously active call is put on hold.2. Select “Swap” again to return to the call on hold.3. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1” or “End call 2”.- or - Select “End all” to end both calls.Conferencing the two calls1. Select “Conference”.Both calls are activated and connected so that all parties can speak to each other.2. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1” or “End call 2”.- or - Select “End all” to end the conference.Speed diallingSpeed dialling is a frequently used function in the US market, which allows dialling without having to enter the complete telephone number.Instead, you can enter the number of a memory lo-cation on the SIM card followed by the “#” charac-ter to dial the corresponding telephone number. The speed dialling function is only available if supported by your mobile phone.1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears.2. Select “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened.3. Select the individual digits of the memory loca-tion on the SIM card one after the other. 4. Select the “#” character.5. Select “Call number”.The corresponding telephone number is insert-ed and dialled. The call menu is displayed.
66 PHONETelephone settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)Setting the ringtone type1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Telephone settings” >“Ringtone type”.A list of the available ringtones is displayed.4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it.After a ringtone is selected, it is played back again.5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if nec-essary by turning the left rotary knob t. The volume level set in this way is saved when you exit the menu.If the connected mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth® (inband ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed out and the ringtone must be set on the mo-bile phone.Setting the ringtone volume1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Telephone settings”>“Ringtone volume”.4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-bols and .The implementation of audio transmission via Bluetooth® often depends on the specific mo-bile phone implementation. If the volume in the vehicle or for the called party is insuffi-cient, it can be readjusted in the PCM.Setting the call volume1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Telephone settings”>“Call volume”.4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-bols and .Setting the microphone volume1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Telephone settings”>“Mic volume”.4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-bols and .Switching 3-way calling on/offProblems may occur with 3-way calling on the PCM as these functions are not correctly support-ed by all mobile phones and telephone networks (in particular CDMA networks).It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched off in such cases in order to ensure reliable tele-phone operation.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Telephone settings”.4. Select “3-way calling” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
PHONE 67Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains:– mobile phones ,– MP3 players as well as – data devices .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Bluetooth settings” >“Device list”.The list is opened. Devices that can be connected with the PCM using different profiles appear only once in the list. The symbol used always corre-sponds to the main application. Mobile phones that can also be used as MP3 play-ers or data devices appear in this list with the telephone symbol.Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCM1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Connect”.Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring a vCard.Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth® device from the PCM1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Disconnect”.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.
68 PHONEDisplaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,–the Bluetooth® address,– the connection quality as well as– the supported services.Adding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”. 1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.> Select “Bluetooth settings”.>“New device”.A search is started and a list of the devic-es found is displayed.3. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.4. The connection is automatically established by the PCM.With some mobile phones, the connection re-quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devic-es. The connection will then be established automatically in the future, without the need for further checks.It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth® device to be authorised.If the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices is full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first de-lete a device from the list. An appropriate message will be displayed. To find out more, please refer to the section “Deleting an au-thorised Bluetooth® device from the list” on page 67.
PHONE 69Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceIf the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also start the authorisation from the mobile phone.1. If another mobile phone is connected with the PCM, switch off Bluetooth® on the connected mobile phone to disconnect the connection with the PCM.2. Press the c button.3. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.The PCM is now visible for external devices.Please ensure that the Bluetooth® visibility of the PCM is activated. To find out more, please see the following section.4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio ac-cessories or devices that support Bluetooth®. Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions to find out how to do this.5. Select the device “PCM” from the mobile phone’s search results and establish a connec-tion.Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions to find out how to do this.6. A request appears on the PCM display. Select “Accept”.7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit Bluetooth® code of your choice and confirm with “OK”.8. Enter the same Bluetooth® code on your mo-bile phone.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.9. With many mobile phones, the connection with the PCM must be explicitly established from the mobile phone following authorisation. Fur-ther details can be found in the operating man-ual for your mobile phone.With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth® code must be directly provided by the mobile phone during the connection request. If this is the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK. You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM display where you must enter the same code and confirm it.Setting visibilityTo ensure that your PCM can be found by other de-vices via the Bluetooth® interface, it must be “vis-ible” (=recognisable) for other devices during the search.To prevent further unwanted connection requests, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Bluetooth settings”. 4. Select “PCM visible” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) visibility of the PCM.
70 PHONEPhonebook settings(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)Setting the memory for the phonebookYou can set which phonebook entries should be shown in the PCM phonebook display:– phonebook entries on the SIM cardand/or – phonebook entries in the telephone’s memory.This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the PCM to your list in the mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Phonebook settings” >“Phonebook memory”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting it.Setting sortingYou can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and call lists to the display on your mobile phone. You have the following options for sorting the phonebook:–“Standard”The phonebook is sorted by surname.–“Alternative”The phonebook is sorted by first name.You have the following options for sorting the call lists:–“Standard”The call lists are sorted in the same order in which the entries were transferred from the mobile phone.–“Alternative”The order of the entries transferred from the mobile phone is reversed. This option supports some mobile phones that transfer the oldest entries first.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Phonebook settings” >“Sorting”.Setting sorting of the phonebook4. Select “Phonebook”.5. Select the sorting you want.Setting sorting of the call lists4Select “Call lists”.5. Select the sorting you want.Setting automatic transfer of the phonebookIf the “Auto update” function is activated, the phonebook of a mobile phone is transferred as soon as the PCM is connected to this mobile phone. As soon as the transfer is complete, the phone-book stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook from the mobile phone. If the “Auto update” function is deactivated, the data will no longer be updated.
PHONE 716. Press the c button. 7. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.8. Select “Phonebook settings”.9. Select “Auto update” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Your phonebook data can then only be ac-cessed when the corresponding mobile phone is connected to the PCM.Transferring the phonebookThis function transfers the phonebook of the con-nected mobile phone into the PCM again. The phonebook stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook from the mobile phone once transfer is complete.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Transfer phonebook”.Transferring the phonebook entries manuallySome mobile phones do not support automatic phonebook transfer. In these cases, you can load entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook into the PCM phonebook manually.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Transfer phonebook”.4. You can now choose whether to add to the phonebook or completely replace it.Select the function you want. 5. Select the entries you want from your mobile phone and transfer them to the PCM via Blue-tooth. The PCM counts the entries already trans-ferred.6. When transfer is complete, select “Ready”.The transferred entries are now available to you in the PCM phonebook.Deleting the phonebookThe copy of the phonebook transferred to the PCM can be deleted again.Your mobile phone’s phonebook remains un-changed.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Delete phonebook”.
72 PHONEOperating the PCM telephoneA SIM card is required if you want to use the inter-nal PCM telephone in telephone mode. You can– insert the SIM card in the slot provided under the display or – connect a suitable mobile phone to the PCM via Bluetooth®. To find out more, please refer to the sections “Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCM” on page 96 and “Adding a new Blue-tooth® device” on page 97.Please note that your mobile phone must sup-port the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile or the Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile for use with the PCM telephone.Inserting the SIM card in the PCMûPush the SIM card (SIM = Subscriber Identifica-tion Module) into the slot provided until it en-gages. To remove the SIM card, press the card into the slot again until it stops.Insert the SIM card so that the metal contacts are on the underside. The slanted corner of the SIM card must be on the rear left. The use of twin SIM cards, for example in the mobile phone and the internal PCM telephone (both cards active at the same time), may im-pair the telephone functions.For more information on this, contact your network provider.If there is no SIM card inserted in the slot, the PCM automatically attempts to establish a Bluetooth® connection with a mobile phone. However, this is only possible if you have –activated Bluetooth® on the PCM and on the mobile phone and – authorised at least one mobile phone on the PCM. If you have not yet authorised a mobile phone on the PCM, you can select “Find telephone” to have the PCM search for and authorise your mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the display.You can find more information in the sections “Au-thorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95 and “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.
PHONE 73Entering the PINAs soon as you have switched on the telephone and inserted the SIM card, you are prompted to enter the PIN (PIN = Personal Identification Number).You will find the PIN in the documentation you re-ceived from your network provider.1. Enter the PIN by selecting the keys on the key-pad shown.The numbers entered will be shown as aster-isks in the input field. 2. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the wrong PIN three times in a row. To unblock the card, you must enter the PUK (Pin Unblocking Key). Follow the instructions on the PCM dis-play to do this.The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the wrong PUK ten times in a row. This block can only be removed by the network provider.You can deactivate the PIN prompt after the de-vice is switched on. To find out more, please refer to the sections “Switching the PIN prompt on or off” on page 93 and “Using a stored PIN” on page 93.Conducting callsThere is a hands-free microphone in the roof con-trol console of the vehicle. This means that you can conduct all telephone calls without using a handset.You control the volume using the left rotary knob t.Conducting a call using a headset 1. Select “Hands-free” in the call menu to switch to hands-free mode.2. Select “Headset” in the call menu to terminate hands-free mode. The call is transferred back to the headset.The call can only be conducted using a head-set if it has previously been connected with the PCM via Bluetooth®.To find out more, please refer to the sections “Authorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95 and “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.Conducting a call using the cordless handset1. Select “Hands-free” in the call menu to switch to hands-free mode.2. Press the Lift handset button on the handset to terminate hands-free mode. The call is trans-ferred back to the handset. To find out more, please refer to the section “Cordless handset” on page 101.Temporarily muting the hands-free microphoneûSelect “Mute microphone” during the call to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.The microphone can also be muted by:– briefly pressing u the left rotary knob - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function)– pressing the left roller on the multi-function steering wheel.
74 PHONEAccepting a call As soon as a call comes in, an appropriate menu is temporarily displayed or an appropriate mes-sage shown in the bottom line.If available, the telephone number and name of the caller are displayed.You can accept the incoming call in a number of ways:ûPressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “Answer” on the display.- or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the Lift handset button l on the multi-function steering wheel.- or - (with handset if available) ûPressing the Lift handset button on the handset.- or - ûRemoving the handset from the charging cra-dle. Ending a callYou can end an active call by:ûPressing the End call button k on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “End call” in the call menu.- or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the End call button k on the multi-function steering wheel.
PHONE 75- or - (with handset if available) ûPressing the End call button on the hand-set. - or - ûPlacing the handset in the charging cradle (if the call is on the handset).Rejecting a callYou can reject an incoming call by:ûPressing the End call button k on the PCM.- or - ûSelecting “Reject” in the call menu.- or - ûBriefly pressing the left rotary knob u.- or - ûSelecting the menu item in the instrument clus-ter using the lower right stalk on the steering wheel. - or - (with multi-function steering wheel with telephone function) ûPressing the End call button k on the multi-function steering wheel.- or - (with handset if available) ûPressing the End call button on the hand-set. Dialling a number1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears.2. Select “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The input field for the telephone number is blank.3. Select the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other. 4. Select “Call number”.The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed.Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code.Using the quick dial (redial) functionPressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a list of previous calls. 1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM.2. Select the person you want to talk to.3. Select “Call number” or press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.- or - Select the first list entry, “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers opens.4. Enter the telephone number you want.5. Select “Call number”.Using the direct dial functionIf a telephone number is displayed in a menu and is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if youûpress the Lift handset button l on the PCM- or - ûtouch the displayed number for at least one second.
76 PHONEHolding a callûYou can hold an active call by pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM.The menu items “New call”, “Take call” and “End call” are then available for you to select.ûTo continue the call, press the Lift handset but-ton l on the PCM again.PCM phonebookAfter you insert a SIM card, the phonebook entries are transferred from the SIM card to the PCM.After a Bluetooth® connection has been estab-lished between the PCM and the mobile phone, the PCM also attempts to transfer the phonebook data from the mobile phone. You can prevent this automatic phonebook transfer by deactivating the “Auto update” function. To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook” on page 70.Displaying the phonebook1. Press the c button. The PHONE main menu appears.2. Select “Phonebook”.The phonebook is opened. If no entries have been stored in it yet, “List empty” is displayed.If entries have already been stored, these are shown in a list.Calling a phonebook entry1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. If there is more than one number stored for this entry, select the number you want.5. Select “Call number”.The number you want is dialled.Creating and storing a phonebook entry(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”. 3. Select “New entry” at the end of the list.4. Select “Name”.The input menu is opened.5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing “OK”. 6. Select “Number”.7. Enter the number you want by selecting the in-dividual digits in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing “OK”.8. Select “Store entry”.The entry is stored on the SIM card.The telephone number must be entered with a dialling code (there are a few exceptions to this). For overseas telephone calls you must also specify the international dialling code.Example: For Germany, you must enter +4917XXX instead of 017XXX if you will be di-alling the number from outside the country.
PHONE 77Editing a phonebook entry(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. Select “Edit”.5. Select the menu item to be edited and make the change you want in the relevant input menu.6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.7. Select “Store entry”.The entry is stored on the SIM card.Deleting a phonebook entry(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. Select “Delete”.A prompt is displayed asking whether the entry selected should actually be deleted.5. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.The phonebook entry is deleted.Deleting the contents of the SIM card(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select any phonebook entry.4. Select “Delete”.5. Select “Delete SIM card”.6. Confirm the prompt which then appears with “Delete all”.Sending a vCardYou can send phonebook entries directly as vCards. A vCard is an “electronic visiting card” that a recipient can accept directly into his or her phonebook.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Phonebook”.3. Select the phonebook entry you want.4. Select “Send vCard”.5. Select one of the two following transfer meth-ods:–“As SMS”–“To Bluetooth”6. If you choose “As SMS”, you must enter the tel-ephone number of the recipient in the input menu that appears.You can also select the number from the phonebook or call lists by selecting the corre-sponding menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section “Creating and sending a new text message” on page 85.>>>If you choose “To Bluetooth”, the list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is dis-played. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press “New data device” (see also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-taining the devices found is displayed. Once you have selected a device in this list, a con-nection is established and the vCard is sent.You can also send a destination entry from the personal destination memory of your naviga-tion system as a vCard. To find out more about this, please refer to the section “Send-ing a destination” on page 149.
78 PHONEList of previous callsWhen a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-nection has been established. The last number di-alled appears at the top of the list.The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones.If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the person called is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.The list of previous calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM.Calling a number from the list of previous calls1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Call number”.Storing a number from the list of previous calls in the phonebookThis function is only available when there is a SIM card inserted.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Store number”.5. Enter the name corresponding to the number and store the entry.To find out more, please refer to the section “PCM phonebook” on page 76.Deleting a number from the list of previous callsEntries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Delete”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The number is deleted from the list.Sending a message to a number from the list of previous callsMessages can only be sent when a SIM card is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the SIM Access Profile.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Send message”.The SMS input menu is opened. The number previously chosen is already entered as the re-cipient.5. Enter and send your message.To find out more, please refer to the section “Replying to a text message” on page 84.
PHONE 79Adding to a number from the list of previous calls1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Previous calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Add to number”.The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing.5. Make the change you want.6. Select “Call number”.The telephone number stored in the list is not changed.List of received callsWhen a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call lists are transferred and displayed after the con-nection has been established. The last call re-ceived appears at the top of the list.The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is not supported by all mobile phones.If the date and time information for the individ-ual calls is not transferred from the mobile phone, the list begins with the unanswered calls. These are then followed by the accept-ed calls.If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry from your phonebook, the name of the caller is displayed instead of the telephone number. Displaying the list 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.The list of received calls is displayed with the time and date of the calls, if this information is available in the PCM. It contains both accepted and missed calls.Calling a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number or name you want.4. If there is more than one telephone number stored for a name, select the number you want.5. Select “Call number”.Storing a number from the list of received calls in the phonebook This function is only available when there is a SIM card inserted.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Store number”.5. Enter the details you want.Please refer to the section “PCM phonebook” on page 76.Deleting a number from the list of received calls Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries on your mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Delete”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.6. The number is deleted from the list.
80 PHONESending a message to a number from the list of received callsMessages can only be sent when a SIM card is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the SIM Access Profile.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Send message”.The SMS input menu is opened. The number previously chosen is already entered as the re-cipient.5. Enter and send your message.To find out more, please refer to the section “Replying to a text message” on page 84.Adding to a number from the list of received calls 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Received calls”.3. Select the number you want.4. Select “Add to number”.The input menu is opened and the number is shown in the input field ready for editing.5. Make the change you want.6. Select “Call number”.The telephone number stored in the list is not changed.Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones)DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be sent once a telephone connection has been estab-lished. You need this function to communicate with touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in remotely to your answering machine).Touch tone dialling1. Select “Dial number” in the call menu.The numerical input menu is opened.2. Enter the digits you want.Each digit is immediately transmitted as a DTMF tone.Combining DTMF tones with a telephone numberYou can use the + and w characters in the numer-ical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with the entry of a telephone number.+The DTMF dialling digits are appended to the digits of the telephone number without any breaks.ûTo enter the + character, touch and hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone in-put menu.wThe digits of the telephone number are di-alled first. As soon as the connection to the telephone number dialled has been es-tablished, the DTMF dialling digits must be confirmed again.ûTo enter the w character, touch and hold the * symbol in the telephone input menu. pThe digits of the telephone number are di-alled first. The PCM then waits until the connection has been established before dialling the DTMF dialling digits.>>>
PHONE 81Establishing an additional callYou can establish an additional call while there is another call active.Some mobile phones do not support making or accepting a second call. In this case, the “New call” menu item is greyed out during an active call.1. Select “New call” in the call menu.2. You then have the following options for enter-ing the telephone number:–“Dial number”:The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. Please refer to the section “Dialling a number” on page 75.–“Phonebook”:You can insert a number stored in the phone-book. To find out more, please refer to the section “Calling a phonebook entry” on page 76.–“Previous calls”:You can insert a telephone number from the list of previous calls. To find out more, please refer to the section “Calling a number from the list of previous calls” on page 78.–“Received calls”:You can insert a telephone number from the list of received calls. To find out more, please refer to the section “Storing a number from the list of received calls in the phonebook” on page 79.The original call is held while the new connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or establish a conference call. To find out more, please refer to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and confer-ence” on page 82.Call waitingThe “Call waiting” function is only available if sup-ported by the network provider.The “Call waiting” function must also be activated in the call settings for the PCM or the mobile phone. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference” on page 65.Rejecting a waiting callIf you receive another call while there is already one active, you will hear a call waiting tone.The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a message appears in the bottom line.ûSelect “Reject”.The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a busy signal. If the caller’s telephone number is transmitted, the number or name appears in the “Received calls” list. The p character cannot be entered in the telephone input menu. It is, howev-er, recognised by the PCM if it is stored in a telephone number on the SIM card, for example. In this case, the behaviour of the PCM is the same as the behaviour for “+” described above.
82 PHONEAccepting a waiting callûSelect “Answer”.The waiting call is accepted and activated. The previously active call is put on hold.You then have the option to switch between the two calls or to establish a conference with both callers. To find out more, please refer to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and confer-ence” on page 82.The PCM will not accept a third incoming call.The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to the mailbox.Ending a connected callûSelect “End connected call”.The currently active call is ended and the first call that is on hold is activated again.Call waiting (swapping) and conferenceThe “Call waiting & conf.” function is only available if supported by the network provider. When using the Bluetooth® hands-free unit, this function is only available for a limited selection of devices.A prerequisite for this function is that there are two calls, one of which is active and one of which is on hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to the sections “Establishing an additional call” on page 63 and “Accepting a waiting call” on page 64.ûSelect “Call waiting & conf.”.You now have a number of options:Swapping between the calls (call waiting)1. Select “Swap”.The system swaps to the other call. The previ-ously active call is put on hold.2. Select “Swap” again to return to the call on hold.3. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1” or “End call 2”.- or - Select “End all” to end both calls.Conferencing the two calls1. Select “Conference”.Both calls are activated and connected so that all parties can speak to each other.2. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1” or “End call 2”.- or - Select “End all” to end the conference.
PHONE 83Using supplementary servicesSupplementary services are services that can be called up using star and hash codes. The supplementary services can either be entered in the number selection menu or selected in the phonebook (provided they have been stored here).The last digit of a supplementary service is always the # character.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Dial number”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. 3. Select the individual digits and symbols of the supplementary service one after the other. 4. Select “Send”.The respective service is called up. If the reply text is too long, it is truncated at the bottom right with “...”.5. If necessary, display the entire text by select-ing “Details”.Making an emergency call1. Press the c button. 2. Select “i”. 3. Select “Emergency call”.4. Select one of the two menu items in the emer-gency call menu that appears:–YesIf you select “Yes”, a connection is estab-lished to the emergency service. –NoIf you select “No”, no emergency call is made. Instead the previous menu is opened again.You can also make an emergency call:– during an active call,– without having to enter a PIN,– while the SIM card is being checked as well as– without a valid SIM card (depending on the country and network).If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, you can call up the current location in-formation in the event of an emergency call. To do this, select the “Location info” function.Text messages (SMS)(with PCM telephone only)You can create and receive text messages (SMS) with the Messages function.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.The list of received text messages is opened.Small symbols indicate the status or type of the text messages:vCards can be sent by other devices to the PCM via Bluetooth® or SMS.unread text message,read text message,unread vCard,read vCard.
84 PHONEArrival of a text message When a new text message arrives, a closed enve-lope symbol is displayed in the bottom line regard-less of the menu selected. If a flashing envelope symbol is displayed in the bottom line, it means there is no more storage space available on the SIM card for text messag-es. To be able to receive further messages, one or more saved messages must first be deleted. To find out more, please refer to the section “De-leting a text message” on page 87.The arrival of a text message can also be indicat-ed by an audible signal.To find out more, please refer to the section “Switching the SMS signal tone on/off” on page 100.Arrival of a vCard The arrival of a vCard is indicated by a message in the bottom line as well as by an audible signal. The envelope symbol in the bottom line is not dis-played.Reading a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.If you have received a text message with your mobile phone and cannot read it on the PCM display, this means that the text message was stored in your mobile phone’s memory and not on the SIM card. The PCM does not have access to the mobile phone memory.In this case, please check whether the stor-age location for the text messages can be changed in your mobile phone’s settings. Please consult the operating instructions for your mobile phone for this purpose.Replying to a text messageThe following options are available to you:–“New text”: The input menu is opened and new text can be entered.–“Attach reply”: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. You can edit or add to the text as you want.–“Reply with YES”: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. The reply “YES” is appended to the end of the text.You can edit or add to the text as you want.–“Reply with NO”: The input menu is opened and the original text of the message is shown in the text field. The reply “NO” is appended to the end of the text.You can edit or add to the text as you want.–“Templates”: A list of the message templates is opened and a template can be accepted or ed-ited by selecting it.Creating a reply with new text1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the text message you want to reply to.4. Select “Reply”.5. Select “New text”.The input menu is opened.6. Enter the text you want using the input menu.7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-ready entered in the text field.8. Select “Send” to send the message.
PHONE 85Creating a text message with attached reply1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the text message you want to reply to.4. Select “Reply”.5. Select “Attach reply”.The input menu is opened. The reply is append-ed to the text received.6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu and confirm by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-ready entered in the text field.7. Select “Send” to send the message.Replying to a text message with Yes or No1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the text message you want to reply to.4. Select “Reply”.5. Select “Reply with YES” or “Reply with NO”.The input menu is opened. 6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu and confirm by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-ready entered in the text field.7. Select “Send” to send the message.Replying to a text message using a text template1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the text message you want to reply to.4. Select “Reply”.5. Select “Templates”.6. Select the template you want in the list that is displayed.7. Select “Edit template” if applicable and make the changes you want in the text. Otherwise, select “Use template” and add any missing information.8. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. The number of the sender of the text message is al-ready entered in the text field.9. Select “Send” to send the message.Creating and sending a new text messageThe following options are available to you for cre-ating a text message:–“New text”: The input menu is opened and new text can be entered.–“Last text”: The input menu is opened and the text of the last message is shown in the text field. You can edit or add to this text as you want.–“Templates”: A list of the message templates is opened and a template can be accepted or ed-ited by selecting it.
86 PHONECreating a text message with new text1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in the list that appears.4. Select “New text”. The input menu is opened.5. Enter the text you want using the input menu.6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. 7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.The following options are available to you:– Enter the digits in the input menu.– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number from the phonebook.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.– Select “Received calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.8. Select “Send” to send the message.Editing and sending the text of the last message1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in the list that appears.4. Select “Last text”.5. Edit the text displayed using the input menu and add to it if applicable.6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. 7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.The following options are available to you:– Enter the digits in the input menu.–Select “Phonebook” to insert the number from the phonebook.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.–Select “Previous calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.–Select “Received calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.8. Select “Send” to send the message.Creating a text message using a text template1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in the list that appears.4. Select “Templates”.5. Select the template you want in the list that is displayed.6. Select “Edit template” if applicable and make the changes you want in the text. Otherwise, select “Use template” and add any missing information.7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
PHONE 878. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.The following options are available to you:– Enter the digits in the input menu.– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number from the phonebook.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.– Select “Received calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.9. Select “Send” to send the message.Forwarding a text message1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Select the text message you want to forward.4. Select “Forward”.The input menu is opened.5. Edit the text message as you want and confirm by selecting “OK”. The text input menu is closed and the input menu for the telephone number is opened. 6. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.The following options are available to you:– Enter the digits in the input menu.–Select “Phonebook” to insert the number from the phonebook.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.–Select “Previous calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.–Select “Received calls” to insert the number from the list.Select the number you want to enter it in the input menu.7. Select “Send” to send the message.Deleting a text message 1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Select the text message you want to delete.4. Select “Delete”.You can then choose whether to delete the se-lected text message only or the entire list.Deleting the selected text message5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The selected text message is deleted.Deleting all text messages5. Select “Delete all”.6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all” again.The text messages are deleted.Reading a vCard1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “All details” to view all of the details in the vCard.
88 PHONEAccepting vCardsIf you save the vCard, the following data is ac-cepted:– the telephone numbers contained in the phonebook as well as – the addresses in the personal destination memory in the navigation menu.To find out more, please refer also to the section “Personal destination memory” on page 146.Accepting a single vCard1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “Accept”.The details of the vCard are checked.5. Confirm the acceptance of the valid addresses and telephone numbers by selecting “OK”.Accepting all vCards1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “Accept all”.5. Select “Accept all” again to confirm the prompt that appears.The details of the vCards are checked and the valid addresses and telephone numbers are accepted.Editing vCard detailsThe addresses and telephone numbers contained on a vCard are listed in the vCard details. The fol-lowing symbols are used:The procedure for editing details is described be-low using address data as an example.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “Addresses”.The addresses are checked.5. Select the address with the “?” symbol.The address is checked again. A search for similar addresses is performed. If similar addresses are found, these are listed after the check is completed.Inserting and editing a similar address6. Select a similar address from the list.7. Select “Edit” if applicable and make the chang-es you want in the address input menu.8. Select “Accept”.After selecting “Accept”, the address can no longer be edited.Details are correct and are accepted when the vCard is saved.Details are correct, but are not accepted when the vCard is saved. An appropriate message will be displayed.?Details are not correct and can be changed or entered again if necessary.
PHONE 89Re-entering an address6. Select “Re-enter address”.The address input menu is opened.If no similar addresses are found during checking, the address input menu opens auto-matically.7. Enter the address you want.8. Select “Accept”.After selecting “Accept”, the address can no longer be edited.Discarding (deleting) vCardsDiscarding a single vCard1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “Discard”.5. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.The vCard is closed and deleted from the list of received messages.Discarding all vCards1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.4. Select “Discard” >“Discard all”.5. Select “Discard all” again to confirm the prompt that appears.The vCards are closed and deleted from the list of received messages.Numbers in text messagesIf a text message contains telephone numbers or geographical coordinates, you can store these di-rectly in the phonebook or list of personal destina-tions.Calling telephone numbers from a text message1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.4. Select “Extract number”.A list of the numbers contained in the text mes-sage is displayed.5. Select the number you want in the list.6. Select “Add to number” if applicable and enter the necessary digits.7. Select “Call number”.The call is made.Storing telephone numbers from a text message(only with the SIM card inserted)1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.4. Select “Extract number”.A list of the numbers contained in the text mes-sage is displayed.5. Select the number you want in the list.6. Select “Store number”.7. Enter the details you want.To find out more, please refer to the section “PCM phonebook” on page 76.
90 PHONEUsing geographical coordinates for route guidance1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Select “Extract number”.4. Open the relevant geographical coordinate by selecting it.The map view is displayed and the geographi-cal coordinate is shown. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Map display” on page 166.5. Select “Start route guidance”.The route is calculated and route guidance starts.Storing geographical coordinates1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Select “Extract number”.4. Open the relevant geographical coordinate by selecting it.The map view is displayed and the geographi-cal coordinate is shown. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Map display” on page 166.5. Select “Store position”.The input menu is opened and the coordinate is entered in the input field.6. Enter the name of the geographical coordinate and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The geographical coordinate is stored in the list of personal destinations and the map view is displayed again.Displaying the complete text1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”. 3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.4. Select “Complete text”.The contents of the text message are shown across the entire display.Creating a templateIncluded in the list of templates are some blank en-tries that you can edit as you want.1. Press the c button. 2. Select “Messages”.3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in the list that appears.4. Select “Templates”.5. Select a blank template in the list that is dis-played.6. Select “Edit template” and enter the text you want. 7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.The template is saved with the entered con-tents and will be subsequently displayed in the list.8. Select “Use template” and add any missing in-formation.9. Enter the telephone number as described in the section “Creating a text message using a text template” on page 86.10.Select “Send” to send the edited template.
PHONE 91Telephone settings (PCM telephone)Switching the PCM telephone on/offSwitching the telephone on1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings” >“Switch on telephone”.The telephone is switched on.Switching the telephone off1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings” >“Switch off telephone”.The telephone is switched off. All func-tions not dependent on the telephone are still available.Setting ringtonesSetting the ringtone type1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings” >“Sound PHONE” >“Ringtone type”.A list of the available ringtones is dis-played.4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it.The ringtone type is played after it is selected. 5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if nec-essary by turning the left rotary knob t. The volume level set in this way is saved when you exit the menu.If the connected mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth® (inband ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed out and the ringtone must be set on the mo-bile phone.Setting the ringtone volume1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings”>“Sound PHONE” >“Ringtone volume”.4. Make the setting you want by turning the right rotary knob q or by selecting the two sym-bols and .Selecting a networkYou can set your PCM so that the network will be automatically or manually selected.This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings” >“Network selection”.
92 PHONE4. Select one of the two available menu items:–Automatic The PCM automatically selects the mobile phone network of the SIM card that is logged in.If this network is not found (e.g. when abroad), the network of a roaming partner is automatically selected. –Manual If you select Manual, the PCM telephone searches for the currently available net-works, from which you can choose the mo-bile phone network you want to use.If a manually selected network is lost for more than 10 seconds, the system switches to au-tomatic network selection.Displaying the IMEIThe IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) is a serial number that permits unique identifica-tion of the hardware in mobile radio equipment. This number allows different network providers to block the telephone in the event of misuse.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Telephone settings”>“IMEI”.The device number is displayed.Switching 3-way calling on/offProblems may occur with 3-way calling on the PCM as these functions are not correctly support-ed by all mobile phones and telephone networks (in particular CDMA networks).It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched off in such cases in order to ensure reliable tele-phone operation.This function is only available if your mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the Hands-Free Profile.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“Telephone settings”.4. Select “3-way calling” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.SIM settings This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile.Changing the PINThis function allows you to change the PIN of your SIM card.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“SIM settings” >“Change PIN”.The input menu for PIN entry is displayed. You must start by entering the current PIN.4. Enter the current PIN by selecting the buttons on the keypad shown and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.You are then prompted to enter the new PIN.
PHONE 935. Enter the new PIN by selecting the buttons on the keypad shown and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.You are then prompted to enter the new PIN a second time to confirm it.6. Enter and confirm the new PIN again.If the two new PINs match you will see the mes-sage “PIN has been changed”.If the two entries do not match, you will be prompted to enter the new PIN again.Switching the PIN prompt on or offThe “PIN prompt” function allows you to switch the PIN prompt on and off.If the function is activated, you will be prompted for the PIN after you insert the SIM card. If the function is deactivated, the PIN prompt is deacti-vated.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“SIM settings”.4. Select “PIN prompt” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.5. Enter the PIN if necessary.The PIN prompt is switched on or off if the PIN is entered correctly. The PIN prompt cannot be switched off with some SIM cards.The PIN cannot be changed using the “Change PIN” function while the PIN prompt is switched off.Using a stored PINIf the “Last PIN” function is activated, the PIN of the SIM card currently inserted is stored. The next time you insert the SIM card, the stored PIN is au-tomatically used for the prompt. 1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“SIM settings”.4. Select “Last PIN” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.If an incorrect PIN entry is registered after the SIM card is inserted, the last PIN will not be used any further. The input menu and the number of attempts still possible are dis-played instead.Call settings (PCM telephone)This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile.Activating call forwardingCall forwarding allows you to forward (divert) calls to another telephone number (e.g. to your answer-ing machine).When you first access the call forwarding system, the status of all call diversions in the network is au-tomatically queried. The individual call forwarding functions cannot be selected during this time.Activating and deactivating call forwarding is not supported in all networks.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Call settings” >“Call forwarding”.
94 PHONE4. Select one of the following settings for call for-warding:–Divert all activates call forwarding for all incoming calls.–Busy activates call forwarding for calls that come in while you are on another call.To be able to activate call forwarding wit h the “Busy” setting, the “Call waiting” function must be switched off first. –No answer activates call forwarding for calls that you cannot or do not want to accept. The call is forwarded to the entered number after a cer-tain time.–Cannot be reached activates call forwarding for calls that come in while the telephone is switched off or is not ready to receive calls.–Cancel all deactivates all call diversions at once. The telephone numbers entered for the individual call diversions remain saved in the network and are displayed again the next time call forwarding is activated.5. Select “Switch on”. The input menu is opened.6. Enter the telephone number you want for the call diversion and confirm your entry by select-ing “OK”.- or - Select “Phonebook”.After selecting Phonebook you can select a number from the phonebook. The call is then diverted to this number.7. If you set the “No answer” call diversion type, you also need to set the delay after which the calls are to be diverted.Select “Delay”.Set the delay you want by selecting it in the list that appears.The relevant call diversion is then activated and the settings are shown on the display.Checking the status of the call diversion1. Select the type of call forwarding you want.2. Select “Check status”.The current status is then queried in the net-work and shown on the display after a few sec-onds.Deactivating call forwarding1. Select the type of call forwarding you want.2. Select “Switch off”. The corresponding call diversion is deactivat-ed.Switching the “Call waiting” function on/offIf the “Call waiting” function is activated, an incom-ing call will be indicated during an active call.The caller hears a ringing tone.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.1. Select “SET PHONE” >“Call settings” >“Call waiting”.2. Select one of the following options:–Select “Switch on” to activate the function.–Select “Switch off” to deactivate the func-tion.–Select “Check status” if the current status is unknown and should be queried in the net-work. The current status will be displayed in the in-formation area as soon as the query is an-swered.
PHONE 95Switching the “Redial” function on/offIf the “Redial” function is activated, the telephone automatically redials a number that could not be reached because the line was busy.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Call settings”.4. Select “Redial” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting transfer of your own numberIf the “Send own number” function is activated, your own telephone number will be sent to the oth-er party.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Call settings”>“Send own number”.4. Select one of the following menu items:–“Yes” if you want to send your own number.–“No” if you want to suppress sending of your own number.–“As network” if you want to adopt the net-work operator or provider’s setting. Depending on the network operator or provid-er, it may not be possible to switch off send-ing of your own number.If you need to dial numbers with special char-acters (+, #, or *), you must choose the “As network” setting.Setting automatic call answeringIf the “Auto. answer” function is activated, the PCM automatically answers all incoming calls after the first ring. The active audio source is muted and the hands-free function automatically activated.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Call settings”.4. Select “Auto. answer” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Bluetooth® settings (PCM telephone)Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains:– mobile phones ,–MP3 players ,– headsets as well as– data devices .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“Bluetooth settings” >“Device list”.Devices that can be connected with the PCM using different profiles appear only once in the list. The symbol used always corresponds to the main application. Mobile phones that can also be used as MP3 players or data devices appear in this list with the telephone symbol.
96 PHONEConnecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCM1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Connect”.Data devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for exam-ple when transferring a vCard.Disconnecting an authorised and connected Bluetooth® device from the PCM1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Disconnect”.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.Setting the profile of the authorised Bluetooth® deviceWith mobile phones that support both the SIM Ac-cess Profile and the Hands-Free Profile you can switch between the two profiles. 1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “SIM access on” or “SIM access off” de-pending on whether you want to activate or de-activate SIM card access.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The switchover option is only available for mo-bile phones that support both profiles. This function is not available in all other cases.
PHONE 97Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devic-es.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,–the Bluetooth® address,– the connection quality as well as– the supported services.Adding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”. If you want to connect a mobile phone using the SIM Access Profile, external SIM mode needs to be activated on some devices.Further details can be found in the operating man-ual for your mobile phone.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“Bluetooth settings” >“New device”.A search is started and a list of the devic-es found is displayed.4. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.With some mobile phones, the connection re-quest by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed on the mobile phone. This may even have to be done a number of times in some cases, for example before transferring the phone-book. To avoid this request, you can authorise the PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devices. The connection will then be established auto-matically in the future, without the need for fur-ther checks. Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth® device to be authorised.If the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices is full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first de-lete a device from the list. An appropriate message will be displayed. To find out more, please refer to the section “Deleting an au-thorised Bluetooth® device from the list” on page 96.
98 PHONESetting visibility To ensure that your PCM can be connected to oth-er devices via the Bluetooth® interface, it must be “visible” (=recognisable) for other devices during the connection operation.To increase security, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation.To prevent further unwanted connection requests, you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the connection operation.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“Bluetooth settings”. >Select “PCM visible” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) visibility of the PCM.Finding the cordless handsetThis function starts the search for the cordless handset.1. Press the c button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE”>“Bluetooth settings” >“Find handset”.The search is started. If the handset has been found and is not in the charging cra-dle, it will ring in confirmation and to help you locate it in the vehicle.Phonebook settingsSetting the memory for the phonebookYou can set whether the phonebook entries on the SIM card, the phonebook entries in the telephone memory and/or the vCards stored in the PCM should be used for the display in the phonebook. This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the PCM to your list in the mobile phone.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Phonebook settings” >“Phonebook memory”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting it.If the transfer of the phonebook data from your mobile phone to the PCM fails, it may be because your mobile phone is working with security mechanisms that affect transfer us-ing the “Phone Book Access Profile” (PBAP). >>>
PHONE 99These security mechanisms require the PCM to be authorised on your mobile phone. As part of this, the telephone requests a “user ID” and a “password” from the PCM. In order for the PCM to gain access to the phonebook, it must log into the telephone.Since the PCM uses the fixed parameters “UserID: PCM3” and “Pass: 0000” for this login, these parameters must be preset as permissible on your mobile phone. Please refer to the operating instructions for your mobile phone to find out whether these settings are required on your mobile phone and how to configure them.Setting sortingYou can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and call lists to the display on your mobile phone. You have the following options for sorting the phonebook:–“Standard”The phonebook is sorted by surname.–“Alternative”The phonebook is sorted by first name.You have the following options for sorting the call lists:–“Standard”The call lists are sorted in the same order in which the entries were transferred from the mobile phone.–“Alternative”The order of the entries transferred from the mobile phone is reversed. This option supports some mobile phones that transfer the oldest entries first.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Phonebook settings” >“Sorting”.Setting sorting of the phonebook4. Select “Phonebook”.5. Select the sorting you want.Setting sorting of the call lists4Select “Call lists”.5. Select the sorting you want.Setting automatic transfer of the phonebookIf the “Auto update” function is activated, the phonebook and the call lists of a mobile phone are transferred as soon as the PCM is connected to this mobile phone. The data stored in the PCM is replaced by the cur-rent phonebook and current call lists from the mo-bile phone as soon as transfer is complete. If the “Auto update” function is deactivated, the data will no longer be updated.This function is not supported by all mobile phones.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Phonebook settings”.4. Select “Auto update” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Your phonebook data can then only be ac-cessed when the corresponding mobile phone is connected to the PCM.
100 PHONETransferring the phonebookThis function transfers the phonebook and call lists of the connected mobile phone into the PCM again. The data stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook and current lists from the mobile phone when transfer is complete.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Phonebook settings” >“Transfer phonebook”.Deleting the phonebookThe copy of the phonebook transferred to the PCM can be deleted again.Your mobile phone’s phonebook remains un-changed.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Phonebook settings” >“Delete phonebook”.Settings for messages and data (PCM telephone)This function is only available with the SIM card inserted or with a connection using the SIM Access Profile.Changing the number of the SMS service centre1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Messages/data”>“SMS service centre”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened. The current number is entered in the input field.4. Enter the telephone number you want and con-firm your entry by pressing “OK”.Switching the SMS signal tone on/offThe signal tone, which sounds when there is an in-coming text message, can be switched on and off.1. Press the c button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PHONE” >“Messages/data”.4. Select “SMS signal tone” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
PHONE 101Cordless handsetThere is a cordless handset available for your PCM.Using a handset while driving is not permitted in all countries. Therefore, please observe the country-specific laws and regulations.Once the internal telephone is switched on, the SIM card inserted and the PIN entered, most of the functions of the internal telephone will also be available on the handset. You can even enter the PIN on either the handset or the PCM.In order to increase battery life, the display is switched off after a certain time, provided the handset is not in the charging cradle.If a mobile phone is connected to the PCM us-ing the Hands-Free Profile, the handset func-tions are not available.Switching the cordless handset on/offûPress and hold the End call button for a few seconds to switch the handset on or off.Charging the cordless handsetûPlace the handset in the charging cradle.General operationOnce you have entered the PIN, the telephone logs into a mobile phone network. On the display of the cordless handset you will see the network provid-er’s logo, the current signal strength, the Blue-tooth® symbol, the charge level of the battery and two menu items.You can select or open the menu items using the selection buttons beneath them. In many cases this brings you to a further menu.You navigate within the individual menus using the rocker button that can be pressed at the top, bot-tom, left and right edges to move the highlighting in the respective direction.Pressing the right selection button under the “Back” menu item brings you to the last menu opened or the next menu level up.DisplayLeft selection Lift handset Rocker buttonRight selection End call buttonNumerical buttonbuttonbuttonkeypad
102 PHONEAccepting a callAs soon as a call comes in, a menu is temporarily displayed on the display of the handset. If available, the telephone number is displayed to-gether with the name of the caller (if an assign-ment to an entry stored in the phonebook is pos-sible).ûPress the left selection button under the “Ac-cept.” menu item.- or -ûPress the Lift handset button on the handset.If the handset is not in the cradle, the ringtone of the PCM is accompanied by a further audio signal.Ending a callûPress the right selection button under the “End” menu item.- or - ûPress the End call button on the handset.Rejecting a callûWhen there is a call incoming, press the right selection button under the “Reject” menu item.Dialling a number1. Enter the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other using the keypad. 2. Press the left selection button under the “Call” menu item.The telephone call is established and the call menu is displayed.If the number dialled is busy, this will be indicat-ed by a message on the display.Always enter the telephone number with the dialling code.You can correct an incorrectly entered number by pressing the right selection button under the “Delete” menu item.Temporarily muting the handset microphoneYou can mute the handset microphone during a phone call. 1. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.2. Select the “Microphone mute” menu item us-ing the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Establishing an additional callYou can establish a further connection with the “New call” function. You can either:– enter a new telephone number or– display and call entries from the phonebook, the list of previous calls or the list of received calls.
PHONE 103Entering a new telephone number1. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.2. Select the “New call” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Enter the individual digits in the telephone number one after the other using the keypad. 5. Press the left selection button under the “Call” menu item.Calling an entry from one of the lists1. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.2. Select the “New call” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Select the list you want using the rocker but-ton.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.6. Select the list item you want using the rocker button.7. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.8. Select “Call” using the rocker button.9. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The active call is retained if the second connection is established. You can switch between the two calls or hold a conference call.Call waiting (swapping) and conferenceThe call waiting (swapping) and conference func-tions are only available if supported and unlocked by the network provider. Call waiting (swapping)While you are on a call, you may receive a call from someone else.1. Press the left selection button under the “Ac-cept.” menu item if you would like to accept the incoming call.2. Press the right selection button under the “Swap” menu item to swap between the two calls.
104 PHONEConference1. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item as soon as you are connect-ed with two callers.2. Select the “Conference” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The two calls are connected and the display shows that you are conferenced.4. Press the right selection button under the “End” menu item to end the two calls.PhonebookIf your mobile phone is connected to the PCM us-ing the SIM Access Profile, the data from the tele-phone memory and from the SIM card will be transferred. Memory entries may contain multiple telephone numbers for a name in this case.Displaying the phonebookûPress the right selection button under the “Phonebook” menu item.- or - ûPress the rocker button upwards or down-wards in the main menu of the handset.Calling a phonebook entry1. Open the phonebook.2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.4. Select “Call” using the rocker button and press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.- or - Press the Lift handset button.You can use the “Search” option to search for specific entries in the phonebook. This is use-ful if there are many entries in your phonebook and you don’t want to have to scroll through the entire list.Creating and storing a phonebook entry(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Open the phonebook.2. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.3. Select “New entry” using the rocker button.4. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.5. Enter the name for the new phonebook entry.The letters on the keypad are active while you are entering the name.This means you can enter the letters a, b and c, for example, by pressing the digit 2 repeatedly.The digits are reactivated while entering a tele-phone number.The input mode can be switched using the “#” but-ton.6. Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.
PHONE 1057. Enter the number for the new phonebook en-try.8. Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.The data is stored on the SIM card. An appro-priate message is displayed if there is no more space on the SIM card.Editing a phonebook entry(only with the SIM card inserted) 1. Open the phonebook.2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.4. Select “Edit entry” using the rocker button.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.6. Edit the name of the phonebook entry as you want.7. Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.8. Edit the telephone number of the phonebook entry as you want.9. Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.The phonebook entry is stored.Deleting a phonebook entry1. Open the phonebook.2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.4. Select “Delete entry” using the rocker button.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.6. Press the left selection button under the “Yes” menu item to confirm the prompt.Text messages (SMS)Some menu items are not available before the SMS list is loaded.Reading a text message 1. Press the left selection button under the “Menu” menu item.2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker button.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The stored messages are listed. Small sym-bols (open or closed envelopes) indicate whether or not the message has already been read.6. Select the message you want using the rocker button.7. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.8. Select the “Read” menu item using the rocker button.9. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The text message is opened.Replying to/forwarding a text message1. Press the left selection button under the “Menu” menu item.2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker button.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.
106 PHONE6. Select the message you want using the rocker button.7. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.8. Using the rocker button, select “Reply” or “Forward” depending on the function you want to use.9. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.10.Enter the text using the letters on the keypad.11.Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.12.Select the “Send” menu item using the rocker button.13.Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The telephone number of the text message sender is displayed.14.Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.The text message is sent.Creating and sending a new text message1. Press the left selection button under the “Menu” menu item.2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Select the “Compose” menu item using the rocker button.5. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.6. Enter the text using the letters on the keypad. The letters on the keypad are active while you are entering the name. This means you can en-ter the letters a, b and c, for example, by pressing the digit 2 repeatedly.The digits are reactivated while entering a tele-phone number.Use the # button to switch the input mode be-tween uppercase, lowercase and digits.If you want to insert the text from a template, select the “Discard template” menu item, highlight the template you want using the rocker button and insert it by pressing the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.7. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item. 8. Select the “Send” menu item using the rocker button.9. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.10.Enter the telephone number.11.Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.The text message is sent.Please proceed as follows if you want to send the message to a telephone number from the phonebook or from one of the two lists (“Pre-vious calls” and “Received calls”):12.Press the left selection button under the “Search” menu item.13.Select the list you want (“Phonebook”, “Previ-ous calls” and “Received calls”) using the rocker button.14.Select the entry you want. 15.Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.The number is inserted in the text field.16.Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.The text message is sent.
PHONE 107Deleting a text message 1. Press the left selection button under the “Menu” menu item.2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.4. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.5. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker button.6. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.7. Select the message you want using the rocker button.8. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.9. Using the rocker button, select the “Delete” menu item if you only want to delete the select-ed text message.Or: Using the rocker button, select the “Delete all” menu item if you want to delete all saved text messages.10.Press the left selection button under the “Yes” menu item to delete the message.Settings1. Press the left selection button under the “Menu” menu item.2. Select the “Settings” menu item using the rocker button.3. Press the left selection button under the “Se-lection” menu item.You then have the following options:–“Language”: Under this menu item you can set the menu language you want for the handset.–“Factory setting”: Under this menu item you can reset the handset to the factory settings.–“Lighting”:Under this menu item you can enter a value for the illumination of the handset display.–“Ring tone”:Under this menu item you can set the volume and profile (ascending volume) for the hand-set ringtone.–“Info”:Under this menu item you will find details of the hardware and software used in your handset.4. Select the menu item you want.5. Press the left selection button under the “Op-tions” menu item.6. Select the setting you want.7. Press the left selection button under the “OK” menu item.
108 INFOINFODisplaying traffic messages (TMC)................109Displaying sections of the route ................... 111Displaying information about the location ...... 111Displaying detailed information about the active audio source.....................................111
INFO 109INFOIn the d menu you will find various general in-formation such as the current audio source, the date and time and the signal strength for your tel-ephone network. You also have the option to call up more detailed information about the traffic situation, your current location, the individual sections in your route or the current audio source.Displaying traffic messages (TMC)Various FM radio stations transmit traffic messag-es in addition to their radio programme (TMC mes-sages = Traffic Message Channel). The PCM eval-uates and displays this information. In some countries (e.g. Great Britain and France), the TMC information transmitted can vary signifi-cantly depending on the local radio station tuned into.The navigation system takes these traffic messag-es into consideration during dynamic route calcu-lation.The broadcasting stations are responsible for the quality of the traffic messages. We there-fore cannot accept any liability for the com-pleteness and correctness of the information.Austria: The location and event code was made available by ASFINAG and BMVIT.You can display the current traffic messages in a list. If the route guidance component of your navi-gation system is active, the traffic messages on your route are displayed in a separate list.The following types of traffic messages are differ-entiated:Objects on the roadObjects on a section of the current, personal routeAccidentAccident on a section of the current, personal routeRoadworksRoadworks on a section of the cur-rent, personal routeSlow moving traffic or traffic jamSlow moving traffic or traffic jam on a section of the current, personal route
110 INFO1. Press the d button.2. Select “Traffic messages”.If route guidance is active, the current traffic messages on your route are listed.3. Select “All traffic messages” if necessary.A list containing all current traffic messages is opened. The traffic messages on your route are highlighted in orange in this list.4. Select a traffic message from the list to call up more detailed information on it.You then see a map section showing the route section in question as well as the full text of the traffic message.5. You can change the map scale if necessary by selecting the two symbols and .You can scroll through the messages by select-ing the symbols and or by turning q the right rotary knob.In the case of very long traffic messages, you can scroll to the previous or next page by se-lecting the symbols and .Accident hazardAccident hazard on a section of the current, personal routeRoute section blockedSection of the current, personal route blockedInformationInformation concerning a section of the current, personal route
INFO 111Displaying sections of the routeIf you have started the route guidance component of your navigation system, a list containing all sec-tions of your route will be displayed. This function is not available during trace record-ing of off-road navigation.1. Press the d button.2. Select “Route list”.The sections of your route are listed and dis-played.The section you are currently driving on is at the very top of this list and the final destination at the very bottom.3. Select the section you want for a more detailed view.You then see a map section showing the route section in question.4. You can change the map scale if necessary by selecting the two symbols and .You can scroll through the various sections by selecting the symbols and or by turning the right rotary knob q.5. If you wish to detour around this section of your route, select “Detour”.To find out more about setting detours, please refer to the section “Setting a detour” on page 153.Displaying information about the locationThis function displays the precise data for your current location. If the route guidance component of your naviga-tion system is active, the next route section is also displayed.1. Press the d button.2. Select “Location info”.The information about your current location and its environs is displayed.Displaying detailed information about the active audio sourceThis function displays information about the audio source currently active. The menu display is adapted to the active audio source. The procedure for calling up the detailed informa-tion during radio mode is described here as an ex-ample.1. Press the d button.2. Select “Details FM”.The available information is displayed.If the display of the radio text has been switched off in the m menu, it will not be displayed here either. To find out more, please refer to the section “Switching RDS ra-dio text on/off” on page 25.In TV mode with digital reception, the station, the start/end time, the name of the current programme, the progress bar (showing how far along the programme is) and the genre are displayed. Further details about the pro-gramme can also be displayed in a list. If the text extends beyond the page, you can scroll through the text using the symbols and or by turning the right rotary knob q. The availability and amount of additional infor-mation transmitted varies from station to sta-tion. With analogue reception, only the name of the station and the channel on which the programme is being broadcast are displayed.
112 CARCARTrip data display .........................................113Setting the display group ..........................113Setting the contents of the personal display113Resetting trip data....................................114ParkAssist..................................................114Deactivating ParkAssist ............................115Switching the ParkAssist display on/off .....115Closing the ParkAssist display ...................115Rear view camera .......................................116Switching the rear view camera display on/off...........................................116Closing the rear view camera display .........117Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on/off..........................................117Parking with the rear view camera display ..117Picture settings for the rear view camera ... 117Combining ParkAssist and the rear view camera display.........................................118Logbook .................................................... 119Activating/deactivating the logbook ........... 119Activating/deactivating the logbook reminder ..................................... 119Setting the standard trip for the logbook....119Editing data from the current trip...............120Continuing recording from the last trip ....... 121Storing a refuelling stop............................122Viewing the list of stored trips ...................122Managing the logbook lists........................ 122Deleting trips ...........................................123Transferring the logbook data ................... 124Bluetooth® settings ..................................124The Sport display........................................127Starting recording ....................................127Stopping recording...................................128Continuing recording ................................128Ending a lap/starting a new lap .................129Timing the interval ....................................129Evaluating a recording ..............................129Renaming a recording...............................130Deleting recordings ..................................130Deleting a lap ...........................................130Storing a lap as the reference lap ..............131Defining the reference lap .........................131Resetting the defined reference lap............131Renaming the reference lap.......................131Deleting the reference lap .........................131Deleting all laps........................................132Setting the display of additional data..........132Transferring data......................................132Bluetooth® settings ..................................133Extended memory.......................................135Setting light options..................................135Setting wiper options ................................136Setting reversing options ..........................137Setting comfort options ............................137Choosing the options for setting the air conditioning.........................................137
CAR 113CARTrip data displayThe CAR menu provides you with a variety of use-ful trip data such as the trip time, distance cov-ered, average speed and average fuel consump-tion.The following display groups are differentiated de-pending on the vehicle’s equipment:–Total trip data The trip data is totalled continuously until re-set. The trip data is retained even after the ve-hicle has been stationary (with the ignition key removed) for relatively long periods.–Trip data since ... The trip data is automatically reset after the car has been parked for 2 hours (with the igni-tion key removed).–Personal trip data The trip data can be individually compiled in four data fields.–Sport displayLap data can be recorded and evaluated using the stopwatch and the PCM. The data of relevance for the evaluation is shown in the Sport display as soon as record-ing is started.The number of displays available to you is shown between the two arrow symbols and . Setting the display groupûTouch the and symbols.- or - ûTurn the right rotary knob q.Setting the contents of the personal displayYou can configure the contents of the individual data fields for the “Personal trip data” yourself. You can choose between general information such as date, time or outside temperature as well as various data fields from the navigation area such as arrival times, average speeds or consumption.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Personal settings”.4. Select the data field to be changed.A list containing multiple menu items is opened.5. Select the menu item you want.The chosen menu item is inserted in the corre-sponding data field.If you fill a data field with the “Distance to next petrol station” menu item, you can start a route calculation to this petrol station by touching the symbol on the display. If you select “Start route guidance”, route guidance to this petrol station is started.
114 CARResetting trip dataPressing the button field for at least 1 sec-ond resets the trip data for the “Total trip data” and “Trip data since ...” display groups.1. Press the w button. 2. Set the display to be reset by selecting the symbols and .3. Select for at least 1 second.The trip data in the corresponding display is re-set.ParkAssistParkAssist indicates the distance between the ve-hicle and an object visually and acoustically for the driver when parking and manoeuvring. The visual parking aid of ParkAssist is shown on the PCM display. Obstacles located in front of and behind the vehicle are indicated using different col-oured fields. These fields show the contour of ob-stacles as well as their distance from the vehicle.ParkAssist is activated automatically when the ignition is turned on up to a speed of approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph).To find out more, please refer also to the cor-responding chapter in the owner’s manual.The following coloured fields are used to show ob-stacles and their distance from the vehicle:If ParkAssist detects a trailer, no distance in-formation is displayed for the rear of the vehi-cle.WARNING!Accident hazard. Even with ParkAssist, re-sponsibility for parking and for assessing ob-stacles lies with the driver.A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk of collision.ûMake sure that there are no people, ani-mals or obstacles within the manoeuvring area.ûIf the continuous tone sounds, do not move the vehicle any closer to an obstacle.Field colour Distance in front of the vehicleDistance behind the vehiclegreen < 120 cm < 180 cmyellow < 80 cm < 80 cmred < 40 cm < 45 cmred with continuous tone< 30 cm < 35 cm
CAR 115Deactivating ParkAssistParkAssist can be deactivated using the A button in the roof control console. The indicator light in the button is lit when ParkAssist is deactivated. In this case there is no automatic display on the PCM. Manual activation of the display is not possi-ble either. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Switching the display on manually” on page 115.ûPress the A button to deactivate or reactivate ParkAssist.Switching the ParkAssist display on/off Switching the automatic display on/offIf the function is activated, the visual parking aid is shown on the PCM under the following conditions:– when reverse gear is engaged, – if a roll backwards is detected, – if the distance at the front is less than 80 cm.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking”. 4. Select “ParkAssist” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Switching the display on manually1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “ParkAssist”.The visual parking aid is shown on the PCM dis-play.When the display is active, you can switch im-mediately to the “SET parking” menu by press-ing the i button.Closing the ParkAssist displayThe display is closed again as soon as you:– disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)),– operate the electric parking brake,– move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear selector into the P position,– press one of the main menu buttons or– press the Back button h.In the two last cases you can press the w button to return to the display.
116 CARRear view cameraThe rear view camera serves to monitor the area behind the vehicle during parking manoeuvres. The image from the rear view camera is shown on the PCM display.You have the option of displaying grid lines in the rear view camera image. These grid lines change according to the current position of the front wheels. They therefore show you where the cur-rent steering wheel turn will bring you.The TV sound is suppressed while the image from the rear view camera is shown on the display. Audio source (FM, AM, CD/DVD, AUX and AUX BT) sound output continues uninter-rupted. There is no rear view camera display when the parking brake is activated.Voice control is not available while the image is displayed.Always keep the rear view camera free from dirt, ice and snow, as these can have an ad-verse effect on the camera image.Switching the rear view camera display on/offSwitching automatic rear view camera display on/offIf the function is activated, the rear view camera image appears on the PCM display automatically when reverse gear is engaged or when the rolling back of the vehicle is detected.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking”. 4. Select “Rear view camera” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Switching the rear view camera display on manually1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking” >“Show RVC image”.The image is shown on the PCM display.WARNING!Injury hazard. The rear view camera only serves to assist the driver. It does not replace looking over your shoulder.The display of objects captured by the rear view camera is distorted. The camera view does not cover the complete area behind the vehicle.ûContinue to pay attention to the complete area behind the vehicle.
CAR 117Closing the rear view camera displayThe rear view camera display is closed again as soon as you:– disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)),– press one of the main menu buttons,– press the Back button h,– operate the electric parking brake or – move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear selector into the P position.Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on/offNo grid lines are displayed in the following sit-uations:– manual activation of the rear view camera display, – driving forwards, –open tailgate or – trailer detected. If your system is not calibrated or there is a steering angle sensor error, please visit a Por-sche workshop.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking”. 4. Select “RVC grid lines” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Parking with the rear view camera display1. Engage reverse gear.2. Turn the steering wheel so that the grid lines guide you into the parking space as accurately as possible.3. Drive backwards carefully until the edges of the blue parking aid are parallel to the parking space.4. Turn the steering wheel to straighten up while the vehicle is stationary. Drive until the end of the lower edge of the blue parking aid is posi-tioned at the end of the parking space.If the ground is uneven, the display of the grid lines may differ from the actual lane. Picture settings for the rear view cameraSetting the Brightness1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking” >“RVC picture param.”>“Brightness”.WARNING!Accident hazard. If the grid lines touch or in-tersect obstacles, there is a risk of collision.ûMake sure that there are no people, ani-mals or obstacles within the manoeuvring area.Accident hazard. If the ground is uneven, the road is slippery or the vehicle is on an incline (e.g. curb, hill) the actual lane may differ from the precalculated grid lines.ûContinue to pay attention to the complete area behind the vehicle.
118 CAR4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two symbols and or by turning the right ro-tary knob t.5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-ed, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image.Setting the Contrast1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking” >“RVC picture param.”>“Contrast”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two symbols and or by turning the right ro-tary knob t.5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-ed, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image.Setting the Colour1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET parking” >“RVC picture param.”>“Colour”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two symbols and or by turning the right ro-tary knob t.5. If the rear view camera is automatically activat-ed, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture configuration and return to the camera image.When the display is active, you can switch im-mediately to the “SET parking” menu by press-ing the i button.Combining ParkAssist and the rear view camera displayYou can combine the ParkAssist and rear view camera display. In this case you can show and hide ParkAssist by touching the vehicle on the dis-play.ParkAssist is shown on either the left or right edge of the screen depending on the steering angle.
CAR 119LogbookThe logbook automatically records all the trips made by the vehicle and stores them together with a variety of relevant information. This includes:– the type of use (business trip, work trip or pri-vate trip), – the date and time, – the start address, – the destination address, – the distance as well as – the odometer reading at the start and destina-tion locations.Recording of a trip is started and ended automat-ically when the logbook is activated. It begins as soon as the vehicle key is inserted.When the vehicle key is removed, recording stops and the information is stored.If a distance of less than 100 metres (approx. 330 feet) is driven, the route is not recorded and is added to the next trip.The trips are recorded even if the PCM has been switched off with the left rotary knob.The logbook can record and store up to 1,500 trips. The stored data can be transferred to a Blue-tooth device or a USB device.You can view and edit the logbook data on a PC us-ing the supplied software.The logbook must be activated before it can be used.Activating/deactivating the logbook1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook”.4. Select “Logbook active” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Activating/deactivating the logbook reminderIf you have activated the “Reminder” function, the logbook menu appears for several seconds each time the PCM starts up.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook”.4. Select “Reminder” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting the standard trip for the logbookThe “Standard trip” function allows you to choose the trip type to be set as standard at the start of a journey.The following trip types are available:–“Business trip”, –“Work trip”, –“Private trip” as well as –“Last trip”.The “Last trip” trip type is only available if at least one trip has been recorded.
120 CAR1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Standard trip”.4. Select the trip type you want.Editing data from the current tripYou can change the different pieces of data regis-tered by the logbook during recording of a trip as many times as you want during the trip.Changing the trip type1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip”.4. Select the trip type you want.Changing the driver1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Driver”.A list of all the drivers created so far is opened.If a driver has been assigned a specific key, this is also shown in the list.4. Insert the driver you want by selecting him or her.Creating a new driver1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Driver”“New driver”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name of the new driver and confirm by selecting “OK”.If the current trip is not a Business trip, but rather a Work trip or Private trip, the only fields available to you are “Driver” and “Re-marks”.Changing the trip destination1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Trip destination”.A list of all the destinations created so far is opened.4. Insert the trip destination you want by select-ing it.Creating a new trip destination1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Trip destination”>“New trip destination”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the new trip destination you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
CAR 121Changing the trip purpose1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Trip purpose”.A list of the trip purposes already cre-ated is opened.4. Insert the trip purpose you want by selecting it.Creating a new trip purpose1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Trip purpose”>“New trip purpose”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the new trip purpose you want and con-firm by selecting “OK”.Changing the contact person1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Contact person”.A list of the contact persons already created is opened.4. Insert the contact person you want by select-ing him or her.Creating a new contact person1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Contact person”>“New contact person”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the new contact person and confirm by selecting “OK”.Changing the remarks1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Current trip” >“Edit trip” >“Remarks”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the text you want and confirm by select-ing “OK”.Continuing recording from the last tripIf a trip has been completed with the logbook acti-vated, the previous trip can be continued the next time a trip is started.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Continue trip”.The data from the last recorded trip is dis-played.You are then asked once more whether you want to continue the last trip.4. Confirm the question by selecting “Yes“.Recording of the last trip is continued.
122 CARStoring a refuelling stopIf you want to store a refuelling stop in the trip cur-rently being recorded, you can do so by selecting “Refuelling stop”.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Refuelling stop”.The question “Store refuelling stop?” ap-pears.4. Confirm the question by selecting “Yes“.The refuelling stop is stored.Viewing the list of stored trips1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Trip list”.The trip list is displayed. If a recording is currently in progress, it is displayed at the top of the list.4. Select a trip to open a detailed view of it. You can scroll between the detailed views for the individual trips by selecting the symbols and .You can switch between scrolling in the de-tailed view and scrolling in the list by pressing the right rotary knob r.Managing the logbook listsIn addition to the lists of stored trips, lists for the Driver, the Trip purpose, the Trip destination and the Contact person are also created in the log-book.Creating a new list entryYou can create a new entry by selecting the first entry in any list (e.g. “New driver”).1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Manage lists”.4. Select the list you want.5. Select the top list entry.The input menu is opened.6. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.The entry is then created in the list.Renaming a list entryYou can rename the individual list entries as many times as you want.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Manage lists”.4. Select the list you want.5. Select the list entry you want.6. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.7. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.The name is now changed.
CAR 123Deleting a list entryYou can delete each individual entry in a list.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Manage lists”.4. Select the list you want.5. Select the list entry you want.6. Select “Delete”.7. Answer the question displayed by selecting “Yes”.The list entry is deleted.Assigning the current key to a driver in the driver listYou can assign the key currently being used to a driver in the list. If this key is used again when the logbook is acti-vated, the logbook “recognises” the driver and au-tomatically records his or her name.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Manage lists”.4. Select the “Driver” list.5. Select the driver you want.6. Select “Assign key”.If the key is already assigned to another driver, you are informed of this at this point. The exist-ing key assignment is discarded once you con-firm this prompt.7. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.The key is assigned to the driver. The assign-ment is now also shown in the list.Deleting an existing key assignmentYou can delete an existing key assignment again.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook” >“Manage lists”.4. Select the “Driver” list.5. Select the driver you want.6. Select “Delete key”.7. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.The assignment is deleted again.Deleting tripsYou can either delete the trips already transferred from your logbook or all recorded trips.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET logbook”>“Delete trips”.Deleting trips already transferred4. Select “Transferred trips”.5. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.All trips already transferred are deleted.
124 CARDeleting all trips5. Select “All trips”.6. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.All trips are deleted.Transferring the logbook dataDepending on how your PCM is equipped, you can transfer stored data via either the Bluetooth® in-terface or the USB interface. The data is not delet-ed during this process.We recommend that you transfer and back up the data at regular intervals.The name of the file where the transferred log-book data is stored is made up of the abbre-viation “FB”, the date (YYMMDD) and the ex-tension “.bin”.Please note that multiple logbooks trans-ferred on the same day will overwrite each other without notice. 1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Transfer data”.Transferring data via the USB interfaceYou can only access the “To USB” transmis-sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section “Notes on the me-dia supported” on page 43.4. Select “To USB”.The data is transferred, provided there is a storage medium without write protection and with sufficient free memory connected.Otherwise you are notified of the problem with the data transfer by means of an error mes-sage.Transferring data via the Bluetooth interfacePlease note that the connection between both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth®. To find out how to activate this connection, please refer to the section “Switching Bluetooth® on” on page 125.5. Select “To Bluetooth”.6. A list of all known devices that may be used for a transfer of logbook data is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press “New de-vice” (see also the section “Adding a new Blue-tooth® device” on page 125). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-taining the devices found is displayed.7. Select the device you want in the list.The data is transferred.You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 125.Bluetooth® settingsCalling up Bluetooth® settings1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Logbook” >“Transfer data” >“Bluetooth settings”.
CAR 125Switching Bluetooth® onûSelect “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Switching Bluetooth® off ûSelect “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Adding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”.1. Select “New data device” in the Bluetooth® settings.A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceTo find out more, please refer to the section “Es-tablishing a connection from an external Blue-tooth® device” on page 69.Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section “Set-ting visibility” on page 69.Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-ised data devices .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devicesûSelect “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCMData devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring the logbook.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.
126 CARDeleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,–the Bluetooth® address as well as– the supported services.
CAR 127The Sport displayThe Sport display is part of the Sport Chrono Package Plus that also includes a stopwatch and buttons for dynamic driving settings (Sport mode). The combination of the stopwatch and the PCM al-lows lap data to be recorded and evaluated.The time is recorded by the stopwatch operated using the CHRONO on-board computer menu in the instrument cluster.Refer also to the section “Chrono” in the vehicle operating manual.The graphical display as well as the storage and evaluation of the recorded lap times and the asso-ciated lap lengths is performed by the PCM.The following information can be recorded and dis-played for each driven lap:– the route,– the fastest lap time and in comparison the cur-rent lap time,– a comparison of the current lap and the fastest lap so far,– the portion of the lap already covered and– the distance or number of laps possible with the remaining fuel.The functions of the Sport display can be used for any route (e.g. journey to work), not just laps.Any recorded lap/distance can be defined as a ref-erence lap. This then forms the basis for compar-ing further laps/routes and recorded times. Laps/distances whose length differs by more than 15 percent (longer or shorter) from the reference dis-tance will be marked in the evaluation.Starting recordingAs soon as the stopwatch in the CHRONO on-board computer menu is started, recording be-gins along with recording of the route, which is shown on the display. You can see the following in the display:– a white line representing the reference lap,– a destination flag marking the start of record-ing,– a yellow line representing your current lap as well as– an orange dot representing the position of the vehicle on the route.
128 CARThe route is only recorded when the display of “Additional data” is activated in the “SET sport display”. To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting the display of additional data” on page 132.The first lap of the recording is used as a refer-ence lap if none has already been loaded. This is needed to display the circle diagram in the lap de-tails as well as to display the remaining laps left in the tank.A maximum of 63 laps can be stored for each recording.Lap informationThe route is displayed when the Sport display is called up. You can then switch between the route and the lap details by selecting the symbols and or by turning the rotary knob q. This information consists of: – the time of the fastest lap,– the current lap time,– information on the remaining tank range (in re-maining laps and as a distance) as well as– the remaining memory available.The left half of the display shows a circle diagram. It indicates the distance covered in relation to a complete lap.The circle diagram assumes different colours de-pending on whether the current lap is faster, as fast as or slower than the previous fastest lap:– green - current lap is faster,– yellow - current lap is as fast,– red - current lap is slower.The number in the centre of the coloured circle in-dicates the current lap.If you have not loaded any reference laps, the first lap recorded will be used as a reference lap. Neither the remaining number of laps nor the fastest lap time is displayed while the first lap is being recorded. The circle diagram is not filled yet either.Available memory is fullIf the available memory is full, a message to this effect appears in the display. The lap details will continue to be displayed, however the lap during which the message appears as well as any further laps will no longer be recorded.A maximum of 8 hours can be recorded.Stopping recordingSelecting “Stop” in the on-board computer menu stops the stopwatch and therefore the recording in progress.The recorded data is stored.Continuing recordingAs soon as the stopwatch is restarted in the on-board computer menu with “Res.”, the Sport dis-play appears again.This is only possible, however, if you do not reset the stopwatch in the on-board computer menu be-forehand.
CAR 129Ending a lap/starting a new lapSelecting “Round” in the on-board computer menu ends one lap and starts a new lap. Timing the intervalSelecting “Int.” in the on-board computer menu and then pressing the stalk forwards displays the interval for several seconds.Evaluating a recording1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol.4. Select the recording you want.5. Select “Evaluation”.The individual laps are shown side-by-side as bars in the evaluation that appears. The height of these bars represents the corresponding lap time. The higher the bar, the longer the lap time.You can scroll forward and backward in the evalu-ation by:ûTouching the symbols and on the dis-play.- or - ûTurning the right rotary knob q.Reference lapIf you did not define a reference lap when record-ing started, the first lap is treated as the reference lap and is shown as “Lap 1/R”.Fastest lapThe laps are generally displayed in orange. The only exception to this is the fastest lap, which is shown in white.Interrupted lapIf a lap is shown with a broken bar, this means that either the driving was interrupted or the vehicle was stationary for a time. Parking periods result when the ignition is switched off.Implausible (divergent) laps are shown in grey.Implausible laps are shown in grey. Laps are re-garded as implausible if their distance deviates more than 15% from the distance of the reference lap.
130 CARRenaming a recording1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol.4. Select the recording you want.5. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.6. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name is now changed.Deleting recordingsYou cannot delete a recording while the “Res.” function can be selected in the on-board computer menu. In order to be able to delete a recording, you must first reset the stopwatch in the on-board computer menu.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. Reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol.Deleting recordings individually4. Select the recording you want.5. Select “Delete”.6. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.The recording is deleted.Deleting all recordings4Select a recording.5. Select “Delete”. >“Delete list”.6. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Delete all”.Deleting a lapYou cannot delete the last lap using the “Delete lap” menu item while the “Res.” function can still be selected in the on-board computer menu. In this case, the stopwatch in the on-board computer must be reset and the lap deleted afterwards. To find out more, please refer to the section “Deleting recordings” on page 130.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the recording you want.5. Select “Evaluation”.6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation.7. Select “Delete lap”.The lap is deleted from the recording.
CAR 131Storing a lap as the reference lap1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. 4. Select the recording you want.5. Select “Evaluation”.6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation.7. Select “Store reference”.The lap is stored as the reference lap.Defining the reference lapIf no reference lap is defined in advance, the first lap in a recording is automatically used as the ref-erence lap.Furthermore, any lap already recorded can be de-fined as the reference lap for the next recording.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened. The reference laps are indicated in the list using the symbol.4. Select the reference lap you want.5. Select “Set reference”.The chosen reference lap is used for future re-cordings.Resetting the defined reference lap1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Reset reference”.The previously defined reference lap is re-set. If no new reference lap is defined, the first lap is used again as the reference lap for any further recordings.Renaming the reference lap1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened.4. Select the reference lap you want.5. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.6. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the reference lap is now changed.Deleting the reference lap1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Sport display” >“Recordings”.A list of the stored recordings is opened.4. Select the reference lap you want.5. Select “Delete”.6. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.The recording is now deleted.
132 CARDeleting all lapsThis function can be used to delete all recordings and reference laps.1. Press the w button. 2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” > Select “SET sport display”.4. “Delete trips”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.Setting the display of additional data1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 3. Select “SET CAR” >“SET sport display”.4. Select “Additional data” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Transferring dataWe recommend that you transfer and back up the data at regular intervals.1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 3. Select “Sport display” >“Transfer data”.A list of the stored recordings is opened.4. Select the recording you want or the “All” list entry.Transferring data via the USB interfaceYou can only access the “To USB” transmis-sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section “Notes on the me-dia supported” on page 43.A directory called “SportChrono” is created on the storage medium during data transfer.5. Select “To USB”.The data is transferred, provided there is a storage medium without write protection and with sufficient free memory connected. Otherwise you are notified of the problem with the data transfer by means of an error mes-sage.Transferring data via the Bluetooth® interfacePlease note that the connection between both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth®. To find out how to activate this connection, please refer to the section “Switching Bluetooth® on” on page 133.5. Select “To Bluetooth”.6. A list of all known devices that may be used for a transfer of data is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press “New device” (see also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® de-vice” on page 133). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-taining the devices found is displayed.7. Select the device you want.You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 133.
CAR 133Bluetooth® settingsCalling up Bluetooth® settings1. Press the w button. 2. Select i. 3. Select “Sport display” >“Transfer data” >“Bluetooth settings”.Switching Bluetooth® onûSelect “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Switching Bluetooth® off ûSelect “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Adding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”.1. Select “New data device” in the Bluetooth® settings.A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceTo find out more, please refer to the section “Es-tablishing a connection from an external Blue-tooth® device” on page 69.Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section “Set-ting visibility” on page 69.Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-ised data devices .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devicesûSelect “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCMData devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring the data from the Sport display.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.
134 CAR3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,– the Bluetooth® address as well as– the supported services.
CAR 135Extended memoryIn the PCM menu you have the option to store var-ious settings for up to three of your vehicle’s igni-tion keys and two of your vehicle’s memory but-tons. Both driver-related settings from the instru-ment cluster as well as PCM settings are stored in this process. The following PCM settings are stored:– the personal data fields of the trip data in the wmain menu,– the stations stored on the station buttons of the various preset memories in radio mode,– the sound settings for the various audio sourc-es,– the volume settings for the various audio sources,– settings for the map view as well as– the settings for voice control.The vehicle-dependent settings are described in the following sections.To find out more about the extended memory, please refer also to the corresponding chapter in the owner’s manual.The range of vehicle settings available in the PCM depends on the vehicle type and the equipment installed.Setting light optionsSetting the daytime running lightsIf the “Daytime Run. Lights” function is active ( ), the lights will always be switched on when the en-gine is running. This applies regardless of the light switch setting.The illumination of the instruments and switches is still switched on and off via the light switch, re-gardless of the “Daytime Run. Lights” setting.This function is only available in countries where daytime running lights are not mandatory.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Exterior lights”.4. Select “Daytime Run. Lights” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting the fade-out time for the exterior lights of the vehicleYou can set a fade-out time of between 10 and 120 seconds for your vehicle’s exterior lights.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Exterior lights” >“Fade-out time”.4. Set the time period you want by touching the two symbols and or by turning the right rotary knob t.The setting is immediately applied.The “Fade-out time” setting also changes the illu-mination duration when unlocking the vehicle.To find out more about this, please refer to the chapter “Welcome home function” in the owner’s manual.
136 CARSetting the alignment for the low beamYou can set the alignment of the low beam head-lights for driving on the right or left.You can only change this function when the vehicle is stationary.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Exterior lights” >“Low beams”.4. Select “Standard” to adapt the headlights to the normal direction of traffic in the delivery country.- or - 4Select “Inverted” to adapt the headlights to the other direction of traffic.Setting the orientation lightThe orientation lighting include the lights in the area of the roof console, the inner door handles and the storage compartments.You can set the intensity of the orientation light on a scale from 0 to 10.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Interior lights” >“Orientation light”.4. Set the intensity you want by touching the two symbols and or by turning the right ro-tary knob t. The setting is immediately applied.Setting the fade-out time for the interior lights of the vehicleYou can set a fade-out time of between 0 and 300 seconds for your vehicle’s interior lights.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Interior lights” >“Fade-out time”.4. Set the time period you want by touching the two symbols and or by turning the right rotary knob t.The setting is immediately applied.Setting wiper optionsYou can choose whether you want to switch on your vehicle’s windscreen wipers yourself or whether they should be controlled automatically.Setting activation of the rain sensor1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Wiper” >“Rain sensor”.4. Select “Automatic” if the rain sensor is to be permanently active as soon as the wiper switch is set to intermittent mode.- or -4Select “Manual” if the rain sensor is to be started manually.
CAR 137Setting activation of the rear wiper1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Wiper” >“Rear wiper”.4. Select “Automatic” if the rear wiper is to be switched on automatically. This happens as soon as reverse gear is engaged and the front wiper has been active during the previous 40 seconds.- or - 4Select “Manual” if the rear wiper is to be start-ed manually.Setting reversing optionsSetting lowering of the right exterior mirrorYou can set whether the right exterior mirror is to be lowered automatically and the direction indica-tor is to be operated when reverse gear is en-gaged.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Reversing options”.4. Select “Lower mirror” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting opening of the rear blindYou can set whether the rear blind is to be opened automatically when reverse gear is engaged.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Light & visibility” >“Reversing options”.4. Select “Open rear blind” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting comfort optionsSetting automatic folding in the exterior mirrorsYou can set whether the exterior mirrors are to be folded in automatically when the vehicle is switched off.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Locking system”.4. Select “Fold in mirror” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Activating the entry aidIf this function is activated, the steering wheel and driver’s seat are retracted automatically to make it easier to get in and out of the vehicle.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions” >“Locking system”.4. Select “Entry aid” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
138 CARChoosing the options for setting the air conditioningSetting the air flow strengthYou can choose whether the air flow for the air conditioning is to be set to “Gentle”, “Normal” or “Strong”.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions”>“Air conditioning” >“Air flow”.4. Select the setting you want.Setting use of the upper ventilation zoneIf this function is activated, the upper ventilation zone is also taken into account for the automatic air conditioning system.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions”>“Air conditioning”.4. Select “Ventilation zone” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting adaptation of the central ventsIf this function is activated, the output temperature at both central vents in the dashboard is adapted.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions”>“Air conditioning”.4. Select “Center cooler” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting automatic air circulationIf this function is activated, the fresh air supply is shut off and the air circulation function is activated if the air quality is poor.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET CAR” >“Vehicle functions”>“Air conditioning”.4. Select “Auto recir. air” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
NAVI 139NAVIGeneral operation .......................................140Navigation safety notice............................ 141Setting the volume of the navigation announcement.......................... 141Repeating a navigation announcement ....... 141Entering an address....................................141Entering the country ................................. 142Entering the town/postal code...................142Entering the street/number ....................... 142Entering the junction.................................143Starting/stopping route guidance.................143Starting route guidance ............................143Stopping route guidance........................... 143Activating alternative routes for route guidance.........................................143Starting route guidance with route alternatives activated................................ 143Displaying information for traffic messages on the route.............................143List of previous destinations ........................ 144Entering an address for a new route guidance session from the list ...................145Displaying the location of a destination.......145Editing the address of a destination ........... 145Deleting................................................... 145Storing a destination in the personal destination memory .................................. 145Calling the destination...............................146Personal destination memory.......................146Storing an address for personal destinations................................146Entering an address for route guidance from the list .............................................147Displaying the location of a destination.......147Editing the address of a destination ...........147Adding destinations ..................................147Entering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the destination memory .....148Editing the destination name......................148Calling the destination...............................148Deleting a destination ...............................148Bluetooth® settings ..................................149Points of interest ........................................151Searching for points of interest by category .............................................151Searching for points of interest by name ....152Searching for points of interest by telephone number ....................................152Searching for points of interest in the map view ...........................................152Starting navigation to the point of interest ..153Changing options for route guidance ............153Setting a detour .......................................153Cancelling a detour...................................154Setting a fast/quick route .........................154Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) ........154Avoiding a stretch of road .........................155Stopovers (tour)..........................................155Entering stopovers ..................................155Via destinations ........................................156Deleting stopovers ...................................157Storing stopovers in the personal destination memory ..................................157Reorganising the stopovers.......................157Destination input using geographical coordinates ................................................158Destination input using the map....................158Storing.......................................................158Storing a destination.................................158Storing a position .....................................159Off-road navigation ......................................159Activating/deactivating off-road navigation..160Safety notice for off-road navigation...........160Landmark navigation.................................160Recording a trip section (trace)..................161Tracing a route.........................................163Reloading data............................................164Changing the navigation database..............164
140 NAVINAVIGeneral operationThe PCM navigation system utilises visual and au-dible driving recommendations to help you reach your destination.The vehicle’s position is determined with the aid of a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation module. The vehicle position is calculated by evaluating and processing additional vehicle signals (e.g. speed) in the navigation computer. This ena-bles the system to automatically correct signal changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre diam-eter), temperature or air pressure variations.The PCM features a hard drive where the digital map data is stored.If an area on this hard drive is damaged or corrupt, the PCM can no longer access the data on it. A message to this effect will be displayed.During an active telephone call, the driving recommendations are suppressed.To ensure you make the most effective use of your PCM navigation system, please observe the fol-lowing points:– GPS reception can be impaired under trees or between high buildings. No GPS reception is possible in multi-storey car parks, tunnels and the like.– The GPS antenna must not be covered by me-tallic or damp objects.– After the vehicle’s on-board voltage has been interrupted (e.g. for changing the vehicle bat-tery), it can take up to 15 minutes or more de-pending on the reception conditions for the GPS to re-initialise.– After transporting the vehicle, for example by ferry, it can take several minutes depending on the reception conditions after switching on un-til the current GPS position is established.– Without GPS reception, the system calculates the current position using the vehicle signals and therefore remains operational in situations where the reception is temporarily poor.– High wheel slip (spin on snow) can result in an incorrect position being given for a short time.– After initial start-up of the navigation system, the fine calibration requires approx. 50 km (30 miles).– After a tyre change (e.g. summer/winter tyres), fine calibration will only be reached after up to 50 km (30 miles).– During fine calibration, full location accuracy is not yet reached.WARNING!Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver and makes recommendations on the routes to take. This does not release you from full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle.As the driver, you must assess the traffic situ-ation. Yo u have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car.ûContinue to pay attention to the traffic situ-ation.
NAVI 141Navigation safety noticeYou are shown a message that the navigation sys-tem is only intended as an aid to the driver as soon as you:– have switched on the PCM and activated route guidanceor– have switched on the PCM and pressed the f button or g button for the first time.ûClose the safety notice by selecting “Confirm”.Setting the volume of the navigation announcement1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI”>“Guidance volume”.4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two symbols and .Repeating a navigation announcementûAfter you have listened to the navigation an-nouncement, press the g button twice in succession.The navigation announcement is repeated.While the navigation announcement is being repeated, you can adjust the volume of the navigation announcement by turning the left rotary knob t. The changed volume is set and stored.Entering an addressAfter you select “Enter address”, the address of the last destination is displayed in the information area. If route guidance is active, the address of the cur-rent destination is displayed.Observe the following points for destination in-put:– Destination input is only possible using the data available on the hard drive of the de-vice.There may be restrictions regarding street names, street numbers, city centres and points of interest. This applies particularly if the destination is located in a partly digi-tised area (map data for this area is inaccu-rate or incomplete).– We are constantly working to collect further data and update available data. Information regarding new or updated software is avail-able from your Porsche partner.
142 NAVIEntering the countryAfter you first select address entry, only the “Country” menu item can be selected. You must enter a country before you can enter the remain-ing address data. Selecting a country in the list1. Press the f button.2. Select “Enter address” >“Country”.A list of the countries for which navigation data is stored on the hard drive is opened.3. Select the country you want in the list.Selecting a country in the map1. Press the f button.2. Select “Enter address” >“Country”.A list of the countries for which navigation data is stored on the hard drive is opened.> Select “Country via map”.A map of Europe is opened.3. Touch the upper or lower map section depend-ing on the country you want to choose.An enlarged map section containing the rele-vant country abbreviations is displayed.4. Select the country you want in the map.Entering the town/postal codeYou can enter the town either by means of its name or its postal code.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Enter address” >“Town/postal code”.The input menu is opened.3. Enter the town name or the postal code.After you enter the first letters of the town and confirm by selecting “OK”, a list containing possible matches is opened.4. Select the town you want in the list.- or -4. Highlight a town in the list and select “Details” in the header.A map section containing the previously high-lighted town is opened. If there are several towns with this name, you can switch between the different map views by touching the sym-bols and on the display.5. Select “OK” to use the town displayed in the map section for route guidance.Entering the street/number1. Press the f button.2. Select “Enter address” >“Street/no.”.The input menu is opened.
NAVI 1433. Enter the street name.After you enter the first letters of the street name, a list containing possible matches is opened.4. Select the street you want in the list.You can also enter the street number later (when route guidance is already active). If you do so, however, you must then restart route guidance.Entering the junction1. Press the f button.2. Select “Enter address” >“Junction”.The input menu is opened.3. Enter the name of the cross street.After you enter the first letters of the street name, a list containing possible matches is opened.4. Select the street you want in the list.Starting/stopping route guidanceStarting route guidanceTo be able to start route guidance, you must have entered at least a country and a town.ûAfter entering the address data, select “Start route guidance” to start route guidance.Stopping route guidanceûSelect “Stop route guidance” in the main menu during an active route guidance session to stop route guidance.Activating alternative routes for route guidance1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI”.4. Select “Route alternatives” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Starting route guidance with route alternatives activatedIf you have activated the route alternatives in the settings menu, the “Start route guidance” menu item is replaced with the “Calculate routes” menu item. 1. Enter an address.2. Select “Calculate routes”.The route alternatives are calculated. Any stop-overs and via destinations that you have en-tered are also taken into account in the calcu-lation.The possible alternative routes are displayed.3. Choose the route you want for the calculation by selecting it.4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route guidance.Displaying information for traffic messages on the routeIf the “Detour prompt” function is activated, infor-mation is displayed for each traffic message– that is on the current route
144 NAVIand– that is at least 10 minutes before the last pos-sible exit before the traffic jam.“Detour prompt” can only be activated if dy-namic route planning is deactivated.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI”.4. Select “Detour prompt” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.A prompt must be confirmed as soon as it is dis-played. The following options are available to you:ûSelect “Detour”.A new route is calculated taking the relevant traffic message into account.ûSelect “Ignore”.The original route guidance session is re-sumed. The traffic message is not taken into account.ûSelect “Details”.The detailed view of the traffic message is dis-played. > Select “Detour” to close the detailed view and calculate a new route.- or - > Press the Back button h to close the detailed view again and ignore the traffic message.You can also close the message or detailed view at any time by pressing any button.List of previous destinationsThis list automatically stores the previous 100 destinations for which you started route guidance.Points of interest are indicated by symbols.You can call up, edit and store the destinations for a new route guidance session.Point of interestTo find out more, please refer to the section “Points of interest” on page 151.Geographical coordinateTo find out more, please refer to the section “Destination input using ge-ographical coordinates” on page 158.Point positioningTo find out more, please refer to the section “Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning)” on page 156.
NAVI 145Entering an address for a new route guidance session from the list1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route guidance.Displaying the location of a destination1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Details”.The location of the chosen destination is shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section “Map display” on page 166.5. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route guidance if needed.Editing the address of a destination1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Address”.The address entry menu is opened.5. Make the changes you want.Deleting1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Delete”.Deleting a destination from the list 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The chosen destination is deleted from the list.Deleting the entire list5. Select “Delete list” >“Delete all”.The entire list is deleted.Storing a destination in the personal destination memoryStoring of destinations in the list of previous desti-nations takes place automatically. If all the memo-ry locations are full, the PCM automatically deletes the oldest entry from the list.If you want to keep a destination permanently available, you can store it in your personal destina-tion memory under a name of your choice.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Store”.The input menu is opened.5. Enter the destination name you want and con-firm by selecting “OK”.The destination is stored in the personal desti-nation memory.
146 NAVICalling the destinationYou can call individual points of interest for which there is a telephone number in the database from the list of previous destinations. This menu item is not available if there is no telephone number stored in the database for a destination or if the telephone function is not available. “Store posi-tion” is displayed instead.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Call”.The number stored in the database is dialled.Personal destination memoryIn your personal destination memory you can store 100 destination entries as well as 15 off-road navigation routes (traces) under freely de-fined names. The personal destination memory also contains the two personal destinations “GO HOME” and “GO TO OFFICE” that can be assigned the corresponding addresses and are always dis-played at the top of the list. Points of interest are indicated by symbols. Storing an address for personal destinationsHere is an example of how to enter the address for the personal destination “GO HOME”:1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select “GO HOME”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears with “Yes”.Storing an address by entering it5. Select “Enter address”.6. If applicable, select “Country” and select the country you want in the list.7. Select the “Town/postal code” and “Street/no.” menu items one after the other and enter the appropriate details in the input menu.8. Select “Store” to store the entered address for the entry.POITo find out more, please refer to the section “Points of interest” on page 151.Geo. co-ordinatesTo find out more, please refer to the section “Destination input using ge-ographical coordinates” on page 158.Point positioningTo find out more, please refer to the section “Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning)” on page 156.Stopovers (tour)To find out more, please refer to the section “Stopovers (tour)” on page 155.TraceTo find out more, please refer to the section “Off-road navigation” on page 159.Landmark listTo find out more, please refer to the section “Off-road navigation” on page 159.
NAVI 147Inserting an address from a list5. Select “Previous destinations“ or “Stored desti-nations”.6. Select the address you want in the list.The address is accepted.It is not possible to store a tour, a trace or a landmark list as a personal destination.Adding an address from a POI search5. Select “POI”.For the rest of the procedure, please refer to the section “Points of interest” on page 151.Entering an address for route guidance from the list1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route guidance.Displaying the location of a destination1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Details”.The location of the chosen destination is shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section “Map display” on page 166.5. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route guidance if needed.Editing the address of a destination1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Address”.The address entry menu is opened.5. Make the changes you want.6. Select “Accept”.7. The old data is overwritten. Adding destinationsTraces cannot be added with this menu item.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select “Add destinations”.Adding addresses by address entry4. Select “Enter address”.5. If applicable, select “Country” and select the country you want in the list.6. Select the “Town/postal code” and “Street/no.” menu items one after the other and enter the appropriate details in the input menu.7. Select “Store” to store the entered address for the entry.Adding destinations by loading from a USB4. Select “Load from USB”.The data is transferred.You can only access the “Load from USB” transmission mode if there is a USB memory stick attached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section “Notes on the media supported” on page 43.
148 NAVIEntering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the destination memoryIn the personal destination memory you can cre-ate a telephone number for each destination for standard navigation.You cannot enter or edit a telephone number if the destination you want is a trace or a point of inter-est (destinations for off-road navigation).1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Telephone number”.The input menu for telephone numbers is opened.5. Enter the number you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.Editing the destination nameThe two personal destinations “GO HOME“ and “GO TO OFFICE” cannot be renamed.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Destination name”.The input menu is opened.5. Make the change you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.Calling the destinationYou can store a telephone number for destinations held in the personal destination memory. This menu item is not available if the telephone function is not available or if you have not stored a tele-phone number for the destination.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Call”.The number stored in the database is dialled.Telephone numbers are also stored for the points of interest held on the hard drive. If, for example, you select a point of interest in the map view, you can establish a telephone con-nection by selecting “Call” in the detailed view of the map view. To find out more, please refer also to the sec-tion “Searching for points of interest in the map view” on page 152.Deleting a destination1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Delete”.Deleting a destination from the list 5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The chosen destination is deleted from the list.Deleting the entire list5. Select “Delete list” >“Delete all”.The entire personal destination memory is deleted. Deletion also affects the two per-sonal destinations “GO HOME“ and “GO TO OFFICE”.
NAVI 149Sending a destinationYou can send individual destinations from the per-sonal destination memory as a text message in the form of a vCard or via the Bluetooth® inter-face.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the destination you want.4. Select “Edit” >“Send”.Sending a destination via USBYou can only access the “To USB” transmis-sion mode if there is a USB memory stick at-tached to the USB interface. To find out more about the permissible USB memory media, please refer to the section “Notes on the me-dia supported” on page 43.5. Select “To USB”.The data is transferred.Sending a destination as a text message5. If you choose “As SMS”, you must enter the tel-ephone number of the recipient in the input menu that appears.You can also select the number from the phonebook by selecting the corresponding menu item. To find out more, please refer to the section “Creating and sending a new text message” on page 85.Sending a destination via the Bluetooth interfacePlease note that the radio connection be-tween both devices must be activated for data transfer using Bluetooth®. To find out how to activate this radio connection, please refer to the section “Switching Bluetooth® on” on page 149.5. Select “To Bluetooth”.6. The list of known devices that are suitable for a transfer is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you can search for further devic-es. To do this, press “New device” (see also the section “Points of interest” on page 151). As soon as the search is complete, a list con-taining the devices found is displayed.7. Select the device you want.You may first need to authorise a new device. To find out more, please refer to the section “Points of interest” on page 151.Bluetooth® settingsCalling up Bluetooth® settings1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select a destination.4. Select “Edit” >“Send” >“Bluetooth settings”.Switching Bluetooth® onûSelect “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.Switching Bluetooth® off ûSelect “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth® settings.
150 NAVIAdding a new Bluetooth® deviceFor the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device, please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the device has been activated and set to “visible”.1. Select “New data device” in the Bluetooth® settings.A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in the list.A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.Once you have entered the code, successful authorisation of the device is shown on the dis-play.Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® deviceTo find out more, please refer to the section “Es-tablishing a connection from an external Blue-tooth® device” on page 69.Setting visibility To find out more, please refer to the section “Set-ting visibility” on page 69.Authorised Bluetooth® devices This function allows you to display a list of the Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to con-nect with your PCM. The list contains all author-ised data devices .Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devicesûSelect “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with the PCMData devices cannot be connected from the list of devices; they can only be connected by calling the appropriate application, for exam-ple when transferring a stored destination.Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Rename”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the name you want and confirm by se-lecting “OK”.The name of the device is now changed in the PCM.Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select the device you want in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Delete”.4. Select “Delete list”.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Delete all”.Displaying details for the authorised Bluetooth® device1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth® settings.2. Select any device in the list.3. Select “Device details”.The following information is displayed:– the device name,– the Bluetooth® address as well as– the supported services.
NAVI 151Points of interestPoints of interest are petrol stations, car parks, restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for example.They are divided into different categories to make them easier for you to find.This function is also available in reduced form in the i menu of the map view:– when route guidance is active under the “Search on route” menu item,– when route guidance is not active under the “Search surroundings” menu item. Searching for points of interest by category1. Press the f button.2. Select “POI” >“Category”.A list of the available categories is opened.3. Select the category you want from the list.A list containing the subcategories is opened.4. Select the subcategory you want.5. You can also restrict the search area if you wish after selecting “Search radius”:–“Vehicle surroundings”The search is performed in the vicinity of the current location.–“Near destination”The search is performed in the vicinity of the currently active destination. –“Along route”The search is performed along the calculat-ed route.–“Free location input”The search is performed in a user-defined lo-cation. You can enter this location in the in-put menu.The “Near destination” and “Along route” menu items are only available during an active route guidance session after the route has been calculated.6. Select the search area you want.7. Start the search by selecting “Show results”.A list containing the search result is displayed. If you chose “Free location input” as the search area, you can expand the radius for a new search by selecting the “Area search” menu item in the result list.The result lists for the “Vehicle surroundings” and “Near destination” search areas show the distance as the crow flies, while the result list for the “Along route” search area shows the actual distance. You can set alphabetical sorting for the “Near destination” search area by selecting the first list entry, “Alphabetical list”.8. Select the point of interest you want.If you fill a data field with the “Distance to next petrol station” menu item in the personal dis-play of the CAR menu, you can start a route calculation to this petrol station by touching the symbol in the data field. To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting the contents of the personal display” on page 113.
152 NAVISearching for points of interest by name1. Press the f button.2. Select “POI”.3. Specify “Category” and “Search radius” if appli-cable.4. Select “Name”.The input menu is opened.5. Enter the first letters of the name of the point of interest. After you enter the first letters of the name, a list containing possible matches is opened.If there are fewer than five points of interest stored for the selected category and search area, a list of the points of interest is opened instead of the input menu.6. Select the point of interest you want in the list.Searching for points of interest by telephone number1. Press the f button.2. Select “POI”.3. Select “Telephone number”.The input menu is opened.4. Enter the telephone number with country code (without “+” or “00”) and confirm by selecting “OK”.If there is more than one address stored for the telephone number you have just entered, a list of the addresses is opened.5. Select the address you want if necessary.Searching for points of interest in the map view1. Touch the map view.A crosshair is displayed.2. Briefly touch the symbol for the point of inter-est in the map view.An orange-coloured ring appears around the point of interest and the name of the point of interest and the “Details” menu are displayed in the header.Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-tary knob u or touching the “Details” menu in the header.You can also view the details for a traffic mes-sage or destination flag shown on the display by touching them.
NAVI 153Starting navigation to the point of interest1. Press the f button.2. Select “POI”.- or - Touch the map view.3. Select the point of interest you want.4. Select “Start route guidance”.The route is calculated and route guidance started.Changing options for route guidanceThe options for route guidance are also avail-able to you in the map view.Setting a detourTo be able to set a detour, you must have activat-ed the route guidance component of your naviga-tion system.If you set a number of detours, they always refer to the current route. Older route calculations are discarded.Setting a detour from the current position1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”>“Detour”>“Distance ahead”.The map view is displayed. You can see your current position as well as the route ahead.4. Switch from one part of the route section to the next by selecting the two symbols and or by turning t the right rotary knob.5. Select “Detour” once you have set the part of the route up to where you want to activate a detour.The new route is calculated. The symbol is displayed before the “Distance ahead” menu item.Setting an alternative route1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”>“Detour”>“Show alt. routes”.The map view is displayed. You can see your current route. The current route guidance session is aborted.4. You can show alternative route suggestions in the map view by selecting “Route 1”, “Route 2” or “Scenic route”.5. Select “Start route guidance” to accept one of these routes after highlighting it.If you exit the menu by pressing the h button, the previously active route guidance is resumed and detours already set are discard-ed.
154 NAVIMaking a detour around route sectionsThe list of route sections shows the individual sec-tions of the calculated route. The section you are currently driving on when you call up the list ap-pears at the top of the list.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”>“Detour”>“Route sections”.The list of route sections is displayed.4. Select the route section you want.A list containing the parts of this route section is displayed.5. Select the parts to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) them.6. Press the Back button h or the f button to activate the detour.7. The detour is then set. This is indicated by the symbol in front of the “Route sections” menu item.Cancelling a detourSelecting “Detour off” cancels all previously set detours.The symbol is no longer displayed and a new route is calculated.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”>“Detour”>“Detour off”.All blocks are cancelled.Setting a fast/quick routeThese two route options allow you to influence how the route is calculated.You can set or change the route options before the route is calculated or during route guidance.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”.4. Activate or deactivate the route option you want by selecting it.–Short route Calculates the shortest route to the destina-tion.–Quick route Calculates the fastest route to the destina-tion.Setting dynamic route planning (TMC)If you have activated dynamic route planning, the traffic messages broadcast by the radio stations are taken into consideration when calculating the route.To find out more about traffic messages, please refer to the section “Displaying traffic messages (TMC)” on page 109.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options”.4. Select “Dynamic reroute ” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
NAVI 155Avoiding a stretch of roadSelecting “Avoid” allows you to set restrictions for route planning. If a restriction is activated ( ), the PCM calculates a route without this type of road. The symbol is displayed before the “Avoid” menu item.If route planning is not possible with the restriction you have set, you are informed of this in an appro-priate message.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route options” >“Avoid”.The following menu items are then available for you to select:–“Toll ”,–“Motorway ”,–“Ferry / Car train ”,–“Tunnel ” and–“Mountain passes ”.4. Select the respective menu items to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.The route is recalculated.Stopovers (tour)You can enter up to four stopovers during an ac-tive navigation session and arrange them in any or-der. The route is recalculated and the destinations are then called at in a so-called tour.As soon as a stopover is approached as an active destination, it is also displayed in the list of previ-ous destinations.The complete tour is displayed in the form of a list of destinations. The currently active destination is at the top of the list. The main destination of the tour is indicated by a black and white destination flag and is the last entry in the list.If the active navigation session is an off-road session, the “Stopovers” and “As stopover” menu items are replaced with the “List of land-marks” and “As landmark” menu items.To find out more about off-road navigation, please refer to the section “Off-road naviga-tion” on page 159.Entering stopovers By entering an address1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“Enter address”.The address input menu is opened.4. Enter the address you want.5. Select “Accept”. If you have already entered at least one stopo-ver, a destination list is opened where you can define the position of the stopover you are in the process of entering.6. Position the stopover by selecting the “empty” list entry at the position you want in the list.From the list of previous destinations1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“Previous destinations”.The list of previous destinations is opened.4. Select the destination you want.The destination is accepted as a stopover.
156 NAVIFrom the destination memory1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.4. Select the destination you want.The destination is accepted as a stopover.Entering a point of interest as a stopover1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“POI”.The POI search is opened.4. Select the point of interest you want.The destination is accepted as a stopover.To find out more about the POI search, please refer to the section “Points of interest” on page 151.Entering a stopover using geographical coordinates1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“Adv. destination input” >“Geo. co-ordinates”.An input menu for geographical coordi-nates is opened.4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.Entering a stopover using the map1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Add” >“Adv. destination input” >“Destination via map”.The map view is displayed.4. Set the destination you want by touching the map and confirm by selecting “OK”.Inserting a destination from the map (point positioning)1. Touch the map view when route guidance is un-derway.A crosshair is displayed.2. Touch the symbol for a point of interest or any other point in the map view.The name of the point of interest or the ad-dress of the chosen point is displayed in the header.3. Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-tary knob u or by touching the header.4. Select “As stopover”.The chosen destination is stored in the destina-tion list as point positioning and indicated with the symbol.Via destinationsIf you have selected a motorway junction as a stopover, this stopover is interpreted as a via des-tination. As soon as a stopover is approached as an active destination, the via destination is also displayed in the list of previous destinations.No estimated time of arrival is given for via desti-nations.
NAVI 157Deleting stopovers1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Delete”.The destination list is opened.Deleting a destination from the list4. Select the destination to be deleted in the list.5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The destination is deleted from the list.Deleting the entire list4. Select a stopover in the list.5. Select “Delete list”.6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.The entire list apart from the main destination is deleted and route guidance is resumed to the main destination.Storing stopovers in the personal destination memoryYou can store all stopovers entered as well as the main destination individually in the personal desti-nation memory.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Store”.The destination list is opened. 4. Select the destination you want to store in the list.The input menu is opened.5. Enter the name you want for the destination and confirm by selecting “OK”.The destination is stored in the personal desti-nation memory under the entered name.Reorganising the stopovers1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Stopovers” >“Sort new”.4. Select the entries in the order you want to nav-igate to them.You can end the reorganisation without completing it by selecting the Back button h. The stopovers not yet reorganised are then appended in their current position to those already sorted.Once you have reorganised all the stopovers, the list is automatically closed and route guid-ance to the new active destination started.
158 NAVIDestination input using geographical coordinatesIf you know the geographical coordinates for a destination, you can use them for destination in-put.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Adv. destination input” >“Geo. co-ordinates”.An input menu is opened.4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.5. Select “Start route guidance”.The route is calculated and route guidance started.Destination input using the mapYou can use the map view for destination input as an alternative to entering an address.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Adv. destination input” >“Destination via map”.The map view is displayed.4. Set the destination you want by touching the map.5. Open the detailed view by pressing the right ro-tary knob u or touching the “Details” menu in the header.6. Select “Start route guidance”.7. The route is calculated and route guidance started.StoringThis menu item allows you to store both a destina-tion and your current position.You can also access this function in the i menu in the map view.Storing a destinationIf route guidance is currently active, you can store either the destination or the entire route depend-ing on the type of route guidance in your personal destination memory. The menu item provided here is tailored to the respective situation.The following options are available:–“Store destination”is displayed during route guidance to an ad-dress, a geographical coordinate or a point of interest.–“Store tour”is displayed during route guidance to a stopo-ver or to the main destination in a tour.–“Store landmarks”is displayed when off-road navigation is active when tracing a landmark navigation session.
NAVI 1591. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Store”.4. Select the menu item shown (e.g. “Store desti-nation”).The input menu is opened.5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing “OK”. Storing a positionYou can store your current position in your person-al destination memory as a geographical coordi-nate by selecting “Store position”.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Store”.4. Select “Store position”.The input menu is opened.5. Enter the name you want by selecting the indi-vidual letters in the input menu and confirm your entry by pressing “OK”. Off-road navigationOff-road navigation allows you to navigate in non-digitised areas (no digital map data available for this area on the hard drive).Observe the applicable regulations in the country in which you are driving. Driving a ve-hicle off official roads is not permissible in all countries.Off-road navigation is generally performed only with the aid of direction arrows and simple naviga-tion announcements. Even when you are driving on a road available in the digital map data on the hard drive, route guidance is via direction arrows only.Off-road navigation works best when the vehicle is located a significant distance (> 100 m (approx. 330 feet)) from the digitised road network.Display during off-road navigationThe following information is displayed during an active off-road navigation session:– A compass display with a vehicle symbol in the centre of the compass rose.– The direction to the next landmark (stopover) symbolised by an orange-coloured direction ar-row.– The directional deviation from the ideal route is symbolised by an orange-coloured arc seg-ment.– The distance as the crow flies to the next land-mark (stopover).Arrival time during off-road navigationDuring off-road navigation, the arrival time displayed in the w menu and elsewhere is cal-culated based on an assumed average speed of 36 km/h (approx. 22 mph).
160 NAVIDetermination of the vehicle position during off-road navigationThe vehicle position is determined with the aid of a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation module. GPS stands for Global Positioning Sys-tem and is a satellite-assisted position tracking system. Further vehicle signals (e.g. speed) are evaluated and processed in the navigation computer to cal-culate the vehicle position.This enables the system to automatically correct signal changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre diameter), temperature or air pressure variations.Activating/deactivating off-road navigation1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Off-road”.4. Select “Off-road” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Off-road navigation is automatically activated when you select an off-road destination (a landmark list or a trace) from the destination memory.Safety notice for off-road navigationWhen you activate off-road navigation you are shown a notice that off-road navigation serves only to assist the driver.ûSelect “Activate „off-road“” to close this safety notice.Landmark navigationWithin the framework of landmark navigation you can – enter a destination by entering an address(> page 141),– enter a destination by specifying the geograph-ical coordinates (> page 158),– enter a destination in the map view (> page 156),– insert a destination from the list of previous destinations(> page 144),– insert a destination from the personal destina-tion memory (> page 146), – enter a point of interest (> page 151) and– enter a maximum of four stopovers, in this case termed “Landmarks” (> page 155).Destinations in the digitised area can also be se-lected from lists and navigated to when off-road navigation is active.These destinations are then reinterpreted as off-road destinations and navigated to using landmark navigation.
NAVI 161During off-road navigation, only individual des-tinations (landmarks) are stored in the list of previous destinations.Landmark lists can be stored in the personal destination memory.Route guidance in landmark navigationRoute guidance is by means of a compass display with the vehicle symbol in the centre of the com-pass rose.The orange-coloured direction arrow always points in the direction of the landmark currently being navigated to.The various landmarks are shown as coloured flags. The angular deviation between the current direc-tion of travel and the direction to the next land-mark is shown as an orange-coloured arc segment and indicated in degrees.Map view in landmark navigationThe individual landmarks are shown as flags in the map view:– Orange-coloured flag: next landmark– Blue flags: landmarks that have not yet been driven to – Checked flag: the current destination land-mark.The routes between the landmarks that have not yet been driven are shown with a blue line.If the route has not yet been covered in full, the portion of the line already covered is shown in or-ange.Additionally, a compass is displayed at the top left to aid orientation.When a landmark is reached, the system outputs the message “Landmark XX reached”.Recording a trip section (trace)Off-road navigation allows you to record a section of a trip, even in non-digitised areas. This is done by setting navigation points (“trace points”). A section of this type is called a trace.Traces can be recorded in off-road mode while route guidance is active.You can record and store up to 15 traces in the personal destination memory.Traces are not stored in the list of previous destinations.
162 NAVIMap view during trace recordingDuring trace recording, the recorded route of the trace is shown as a blue line in the map view.Map view when following a traceWhen you drive a recorded trace, the route ahead is shown in the map in orange and the route al-ready covered is shown in grey.Starting recording1. When off-road navigation is activated, press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Off-road” >“Record trace”.4. Select “From start point” if you want to start re-cording from the start of the journey. Trace re-cording is continued, starting from the current point. The data automatically stored from the beginning of the journey is transferred.- or - Select “From current position” if you want to start recording from the current position. The data automatically stored from the beginning of the journey is deleted.If you have already recorded a trace during the trip, deleted the trace or changed the grid for set-ting the navigation points, you will only be able to record a new trace using the “From current posi-tion” function.You can also access the “Record trace” and “End trace” functions in the option menu in the map view when off-road navigation is activat-ed.Ending trace recording1. Press the f button while recording is un-derway.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Off-road” >“End trace”.Storing a recordingAs soon as you end a trace recording you are asked whether this trace should be stored in the destination memory.1. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting “Yes”.2. The input menu is opened. A suggestion for a name is already provided in the input field.3. Change the suggested name as you want and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
NAVI 163Setting the grid for automatic setting of the navigation pointsYou can set the intervals at which the so-called trace points are set during trace recording:–“Optimised”The navigation system automatically gener-ates a navigation point at geometrically practi-cal locations in order to record the trace.The number of navigation points set by the sys-tem depends on the frequency of the changes in direction.–“Set ... mls”Here you define at what point in the driven route a navigation point is to be set during trace recording. The navigation points are set regardless of any changes in direction. Up to 1,000 trace points per trace are set during recording. The setting chosen when setting the points determines the maximum route that can be recorded. The memory remaining for the active recording is displayed in the map.1. When off-road navigation is switched on, press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Off-road” >“Off-road settings”.4. Select “Recording mode”.5. Set the grid you want by selecting it.Setting trace points manuallyYou can also set trace points manually during trace recording.1. Press the f button while trace recording is underway.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Off-road” >“Set trace point”.Tracing a routeYou have various options when tracing routes, based on the trace direction (“Trace forward” and “Trace backward”) and trace point (“From start point” and “From current position”):– From start point, trace forwards: You are directed to the start point of the re-cording and drive the trace from the start point to the end point.– From start point, trace backwards:You are directed to the end point of the record-ing and drive the trace from the end point to the start point.– From current position, trace forwards: You are directed to the closest point in the trace and drive the trace in the direction of the end point.– From current position, trace backwards: You are directed to the closest point in the trace and drive the trace in the direction of the start point.After starting navigation, you are navigated to the next navigation point. Route guidance is by means of a compass display with the vehicle symbol in the centre of the compass rose.
164 NAVIThe orange-coloured arc segment points in the di-rection of the navigation point currently being nav-igated to. The angular deviation between the cur-rent direction of travel and the direction to the next navigation point is shown as an orange-coloured segment. The angular deviation is indicated in de-grees.1. Press the f button.2. Select “Stored destinations”.The personal destination memory is opened.3. Select the trace you want in the list.4. Select “Start route guidance”.If off-road navigation is not yet activated, the safety notice is displayed. 5. Confirm the safety notice with “Activate „off-road“” if applicable to activate off-road naviga-tion.6. Select the direction of travel you want and the start point you want along the route to be driv-en.Route guidance is started.Reloading dataChanging the navigation databaseIf the selected destination lies outside of the cur-rent navigation database, a route is calculated to a point that is close to the destination entered and is located within the database. Route guidance from this point is interpreted as off-road route guidance, as there is no map data available.If there is additional map data available on the PCM, this can be reloaded.If a selected destination lies outside of the current database and there is a geographical coordinate saved for this destination, route guidance to this destination can be started.1. Press the f button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET NAVI” >“Re-load data” >“Database switch”.A list of the available databases is opened.4. Select the required database in the list.5. Confirm the prompt that appears and perform the database search by selecting “Yes”.
Map display 165MAPMap display ............................................... 166Changing the scale of the map.................. 166Moving the map....................................... 166Setting 3D display ................................... 166Displaying traffic messages...................... 167Setting the display of the total route.......... 167Setting autozoom .................................... 167Displaying destination/location info ........... 167Operating the map menu using symbols .... 167Displaying sections of the route ................ 168Setting the display layout ......................... 168Compiling map contents........................... 169Basic voice control functions....................... 175Setting the volume................................... 175
166 Map displayMAPMap displayYou call up the map view of the navigation system by pressing the g button.Your vehicle is shown in the map view as a triangu-lar arrow. The arrowhead points in the direction of travel. The centre of the vehicle is represented by the black dot in the middle of the small triangle.The recommended driving route, streets, rivers, railroad tracks, wooded areas or lakes are dis-played as coloured lines or areas. The detail depends on the map scale set.When route guidance is active, either the expected time of arrival or the remaining trip time in hours and distance from destination are displayed at the bottom of the display. You can switch back and forth between the two options by briefly touching the display. You can choose for yourself the content shown in the map view. To find out more, please refer to the section “Compiling map contents” on page 169.You can also call up and operate the map view menu using symbols. To find out more, please refer to the section “Operating the map menu using symbols” on page 167.Changing the scale of the mapThe current scale is shown in the bottom right of the map in the map display.ûSet the map scale you want by turning the right rotary knob t.A number of map views also display the two sym-bols and .ûChange the map scale you want by touching the two symbols on the display.Moving the mapYou can move the map section shown on the dis-play as you want. You have two options for doing this:ûBriefly touch the display to move the map sec-tion so that the centre point of the map is at the point you touched.- or - ûTouch and hold a point in the map view to keep moving the map in the direction of this point. The map will keep moving until you stop touch-ing the screen.Setting 3D displayIf this function is activated, a three-dimensional map view is shown. 1. Press the g button.2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r.3. Select “Bird‘s-eye view” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
Map display 167Displaying traffic messagesWhen this function is activated, traffic information is also shown in the map view.1. Press the g button.2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r.3. Select “Show traffic” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting the display of the total routeIf you have activated this function, the total route from the vehicle position to the destination flag is displayed during route guidance.The map scale is automatically adapted. 1. Press the g button.2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r.3. Select “Total route” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Setting autozoomIf you have activated this function, the entire cur-rent route section is displayed. As soon as you leave the current route section, the next route section is displayed in the map. The map scale is calculated and dynamically adapted according to the length of the new route section.1. Press the g button.2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r.3. Select “Autozoom” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.Displaying Destination/Location infoWhen route guidance is active, selecting the “Show destination” or “Show location” function displays the relevant position in accordance with the zoom functions currently active.1. Press the g button.2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the right rotary knob r.3. Select “Show destination”.The destination town is displayed on the map.4. If necessary, select “Show location”.The current location of the vehicle is displayed on the map.Operating the map menu using symbolsIf you have activated the “Map menu” menu item in the map display, you can also operate the map menu functions by touching the corresponding symbols on the display. To find out more, please refer also to the section “Compiling the map information” on page 169.1. Press the g button.2. Touch the symbol for the map menu on the display.The following symbols are displayed:Switch three-dimensional map view on/offShow/hide traffic messagesSwitch display of the total route on/offSwitch autozoom on/offSwitch between location map and destination map
168 Map display3. To activate or deactivate a menu item, briefly touch the menu item on the display.When menu items are activated, the corre-sponding symbols are displayed in orange.Displaying sections of the routeIf you have started the route guidance component of your navigation system, a list containing all sec-tions of your route will be displayed. 1. Press the g button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “Route list”.The sections of your route are listed and dis-played.The section you are currently driving on is at the very top of this list and the final destination at the very bottom.4. Select the section you want for a more detailed view.You then see a map section showing the route section in question.5. You can adjust the map scale by touching the two symbols and , as well as scroll through the various sections by touching the symbols and .6. If you wish to detour around this section of your route, select “Detour”.To find out more about setting detours, please refer to the section “Setting a detour” on page 153.This function is also available under the “Route list” menu item in the d menu.If off-road navigation is activated, a restricted version of this function is available with so-called landmark navigation.Setting the display layoutYou have four options for dividing the display while route guidance is active:–“Full screen map”The map is shown across the entire display.–“With guidance”In addition to the relevant map section, the next driving instruction is shown in the right half of the display.–“With direction list”In addition to the relevant map section, the next manoeuvre is shown with the help of pic-tograms.–“With route preview”In addition to the map section containing the current position, a further map section contain-ing the route ahead is shown.1. Press the g button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.
Map display 1693. Select “SET MAP” >“Map layout”.The various options for the display layout are shown.4. Select the layout you want.The chosen layout is set.Switching between different layoutsûIf you choose the “With guidance”, “With di-rection list” or “With route preview” layout, you can switch to the full-screen map by briefly touching the right half of the display. The driving instructions are then shown in a small window in the top left corner of the dis-play.ûIn the “Full screen map” layout, you can switch to the previously set split screen layout by briefly touching the so-called mini driving in-structions in the top left corner.Compiling map contentsYou can adapt the map view to your requirements by selecting various elements and settings.Compiling the map information1. Press the g button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET MAP” >“Map view”.The following map display criteria are then availa-ble to you:–“Junction zoom” When this function is activated, the upcoming driving manoeuvre (e.g. leaving the motorway) is displayed greatly enlarged during route guid-ance.If you press the Back button h while a driving manoeuvre is shown in enlarged form, the enlarged view is cancelled. However, the function remains active.Pressing the Back button h again reac-tivates the enlarged display.If you have activated the “Junction zoom” function and an upcoming driving manoeuvre is displayed in enlarged form, it is not possible to display another function such as “Show destination” at this point.–“Bird‘s-eye view” When this function is activated, a perspective map view is displayed.–“Terrain model (Bird‘s-eye view)” When this function is activated, a 3D terrain model is displayed.–“3D building” When this function is activated, a 3D town model is displayed when the 3D map is activat-ed.–“3D POIs”When this function is activated, the 3D points of interest are only displayed in the 3D map.–“Satellite image” When this function is activated, a satellite im-age is displayed for a scale of over 2 km (ap-prox. 1.2 miles).–“Speed limit” When this function is activated, speed limits are displayed in the driving instructions (see CAR).
170 Map display–“Show traffic” When this function is activated, the traffic mes-sages are displayed in the map view.–“Guidance” When this function is activated, driving instruc-tions are displayed in the form of arrow sym-bols.–“Footer (station/track)” When this function is activated, the footer is also shown in the map view.–“Map menu” When this function is activated, a symbol is dis-played in the map view that gives you access to all of the functions of the map menu.–“North arrow” When this function is activated, a north arrow is displayed.–“North orientation” When this function is activated, the map will be oriented to the north. If the “Bird‘s-eye view” option is active, the “North orientation” option has no function.–“Day/night switchover” The following options are available for you to select:–“Automatic”The map view automatically switches from day design to night design as a function of the vehicle lighting.–“Day”The map view always remains set to the day design colours. This means the display col-ours are optimised for legibility.–“Night”The map view always remains set to the night design colours. The display colours are dimmed to prevent glare.–“Display arrival time” You can choose whether the estimated “Arrival time” or the “Remaining time” is to be dis-played in the map view.4. Select the various list items to show ( ) or hide ( ) them in the map view.The map view is adapted in accordance with your settings.Compiling the points of interest to be displayed1. Press the g button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET MAP” >“Show POIs”.The list containing the various point of inter-est categories is displayed.4. Select the point of interest category you want.The list containing the associated subcatego-ries is displayed.5. Select the various subcategories to show ( ) or hide ( ) them in the map view.The map view is adapted in accordance with your settings.WARNING!Accident hazard. The navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver. This does not release you from your full responsibility for observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal road traffic regulations and any other relevant regulations while driving your vehicle.Road signs en-route should always be heeded. The speed limit displayed by the PCM may not always be correct. As the driver, you must assess the particular speed limit. Yo u have sole responsibility for road safety while driving your car.ûContinue to heed road signs en-route.
Voice control 171Voice controlHow voice control works............................. 172Incorrect operation and cancelling a dialogue ............................................... 172Functions of the button on the stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher ...................................... 172Speech intelligibility.................................. 172Symbols in sample dialogues ...................... 173Commands ................................................ 173Local commands .................................... 173Global commands ................................... 173Voice entries .......................................... 174Activating voice control ............................ 175Deactivating voice control ........................ 175Setting the language ............................... 175Configuring the voice control system......... 176Performing voice adaptation ..................... 177Using the help function ............................... 177Operating lists using voice control ............ 178Operating examples ................................... 179Operating example for radio mode............ 179Operating example for TV tuner ................ 181Operating example for CD/DVD mode ....... 182Operating example for iPod mode ............. 183Operating example for telephone mode ..... 185Operating example for navigation mode..... 189Operating example for map ...................... 192
172 Voice controlVoice controlPlease refer to the information on operation and road safety on page 6. The PCM is fully voice controllable (with the excep-tion of the functions in the w and b menus as well as the various SET menus).The voice control system is designed so that you can generally say each menu item shown on the display. Exceptions are indicated by an appropri-ate message on the display of the PCM. Voice control is activated by pressing the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher (please see also section “Ac-tivating voice control” on page 175). This allows you to operate the PCM without taking your hands from the steering wheel.How voice control worksThe voice control system recognises commands or numerical sequences regardless of the speak-er. It provides acoustic feedback and guides you through the functions.Incorrect operation and cancelling a dialogueIf you say an incorrect or unavailable command, the voice control system responds with “Could you repeat that?” and you can repeat the command. After the 2nd failed attempt, the system offers as-sistance; after the 3rd failed attempt, the PCM aborts the operation and terminates the dialogue with “End”.You have the following options for terminating voice control during a dialogue:ûSay “cancel” when the voice control system is expecting a command.ûSay “End” when the voice control system is ex-pecting a command.ûPress any button on the PCM.The PCM then executes the function corre-sponding to the pressed button.ûThe only exception to this is the volume con-trol. You can only use this button to adapt the volume of the announcements, not to termi-nate a dialogue.Functions of the button on the stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher By pressing the button on the stalk for direction in-dicators, high beam and headlight flasher you can: – terminate a voice control announcement while it is in progress,– skip to the next part of the announcement in the case of announcements with multiple parts,– cancel a dialogue manually.The button has no function during a telephone call. Speech intelligibilityTo make it easier for your voice control system to understand your commands, please note the fol-lowing points:– The hands-free microphone is directed to-wards the driver’s seat. The voice control sys-tem should therefore be operated by the driv-er. – Do not speak while your voice control system is making an announcement.– Speak without interruptions and at a normal volume. Avoid long pauses and excessive em-phasis.
Voice control 173– Reduce background noise by closing the win-dows, doors and sunroof.– While giving voice commands, avoid other noise in the vehicle (e.g. passengers speaking among themselves).Symbols in sample dialoguesA number of the voice commands initiate dia-logues between you and the voice control system. A few of these dialogues are presented in the op-erating manual as examples.The following symbols are used in the sample dia-logues:y symbol This symbol identifies a voice command spoken by you.; symbol This symbol identifies an announcement made by the PCM. symbol This symbol identifies a message shown on the PCM display.BeepÒsymbol This symbol identifies the audible signal that sounds as soon as the PCM is ready to accept a command.CommandsThe commands supported by your voice control system are divided into two categories:Local commands Local commands can only be spoken within the re-spective main function. They are not listed here since they include all menu items shown on the display. The only exceptions are the w and b menus as well as the various SET men-us. These are not voice controllable.Voice control for lists is different and is described in the section “Operating lists using voice control” on page 178.Global commands Global commands can be spoken in any function. They include: – the main functions of your PCM, – selected shortcuts (branching directly to a function without opening its main function be-forehand) as well as – the various help topics.WARNING!Accident hazard Since stressful situations can cause your voice to change, it may happen that a telephone connection you want is not es-tablished quickly enough.ûDo not use the voice control system to op-erate the telephone in cases of emergency.For safety reasons, an emergency call can only be initiated directly on the device.
174 Voice controlGlobal commands for the voice-controlled main functions:–Tuner, radio–Disc, CD – phone, Telephone–info–navi, Navigation–map Global commands for the non-voice-controlled main functions:–sound –carGlobal commands related to the telephone:– call, phone– call name, make call to name– Dial numberGlobal commands related to navigation:– go to destination, go to destination ...*– begin route guidance– cancel route guidance– enter address– input country– input town– input street– input junction–go home– go to office–search ATM– search hotel–search restaurant– search petrol stationGlobal commands for the help function:–help– help voice control– help devices–help source– help tuner – help disc – help phone, help telephone–help info– help navi, help navigation –help map – help optionOther global commands:–source –traffic messages–set TP– deactivate set TP– traffic messages, show traffic messages, Read out traffic messages on route–cancel, end–back Voice entries You can assign so-called voice entries for entries in the phonebook as well as for destinations in your personal destination memory. These voice entries are intended to make it easier for you to call up people or places with names that are difficult to understand (e.g. foreign names).You can assign 20 voice entries each for the phonebook and destination memory.Please note that recognition of the voice en-tries depends on the language currently se-lected for the voice control system. Therefore, always use the language that you wish to use for voice control when creating the voice entries.If you change the language, the system may no longer reliably recognise the voice entries that you have trained it for in another lan-guage.
Voice control 175Basic voice control functionsActivating voice controlYou cannot activate the voice control system while you are on a telephone call.1. Switch on the ignition and the PCM.2. Press the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher.An audible signal sounds after a short time, the voice control system is activated and awaits a spoken command. If you do not say a com-mand, the voice control system prompts you to speak with the request, “Could you repeat that?”.As soon as the voice control system is activated, you will see one of the following symbols at the top right of the display: – = The voice control system is awaiting a spoken command.– = The voice control system is currently making an announcement.Deactivating voice controlYou can deactivate the voice control system as fol-lows:ûPress the button on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher.- or - ûSay “cancel” or “end” when the voice control system is expecting a command.After the system is deactivated, you will hear a confirmation announcement of “End”, after which the voice control system switches off.Setting the volumeYou can change the volume of the voice control system announcements to compensate for chang-es in the ambient noise during the journey, for ex-ample.1. Activate the voice control system and say a command such as “help”.2. Turn the volume control on your device during an announcement to raise or lower the volume of the announcement. The volume of the voice control system an-nouncements is independent of that of the tel-ephone and audio system.Setting the language The voice control system recognises various lan-guages. When you change the language, it affects voice input by the user, voice output by the PCM and the language shown on the display.
176 Voice controlSelecting the language yourself1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM language”.4. Select the language you want.Adapting the language to the instrument cluster1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system” >“PCM language”.4. Select “Automatic”.The language of the instrument cluster is set.If the language of the instrument cluster is not available as a language in the PCM, the lan-guage “English GB” is set.Configuring the voice control systemYou can configure how you interact with the voice control system in just a few steps.1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system”>“Voice control”.The following options are then available for you to select:–“Repeat” The voice control system repeats all recog-nised commands. You can switch off this repetition. Switching it off makes using the voice control system faster but this comes at the expense of not knowing whether the voice control system has correctly recog-nised the command given. Voice entries and digits are always repeated, even if the function is switched off.–“Quick dialog” If you activate this function, the PCM outputs certain announcements in an abridged form. This does not change the information con-tent of the announcements. This option is useful for experienced users.–“Show hints” This function is switched on at the factory. If it is switched on and voice control is activat-ed, the PCM shows you commands that are available in addition to the menu items al-ready shown.4. Select to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the re-spective function.
Voice control 177Performing voice adaptationThe voice adaptation function allows you to individ-ually adapt the voice control system to your voice, thereby improving the voice recognition. This does not impair the recognition of other users. Adaptation can only be performed when the vehicle is stationary. Please note the first five points in the section “Speech intelligibility” on page 172 in connection with this.Starting/cancelling voice adaptation1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system”>“Voice control” >“Voice adaptation”.4. Select “Start adaptation”.Adaptation starts and commences interaction with the user.5. Follow the instructions of the PCM and repeat each command and numerical sequence after the tone.Adaptation ends automatically after the last command and the data is automatically stored.6. Select “Cancel” to abort the adaptation.In this case no data is stored.Deleting voice adaptation1. Press the w button.2. Press the i button or touch the tab of the same name in the header.3. Select “SET PCM system”>“Voice control” >“Voice adaptation”.4. Select “Delete adaptation”.5. Select “Yes” or “No”.The adaptation is deleted or not deleted de-pending on your selection.Using the help functionHelp functions in the PCMThe voice control system features an integrated help function with commands that are always avail-able. You will find an overview of the commands in the section “Global commands”, subsection “Glo-bal commands for the help function:” on page 174.Below you will find a brief description of the most important help commands.– “help” command:When you say this command, the PCM reads out the commands available for the menu items currently shown. It also tells you the commands to use to obtain further help.– “help voice control” command: This command interactively guides you to the help you need using the available help topics and help areas.– “help devices” command: After this command, the PCM prompts you for the main function on which you need help, for example tuner or disc. You are then interac-tively guided to the help you want using the available help topics and help areas.
178 Voice control– “help” command, followed by a main function, e.g. “Disc”:This command allows you to skip the step of specifying the main function for which you need help. It brings you directly to the help for a specific main function.Like the voice control system, you can also deac-tivate the help. To find out how to do this, please refer to the section “Deactivating voice control” on page 175.Help texts in the instrument clusterDuring a dialogue between you and the voice con-trol system, information, voice-controlled com-mands and lists are displayed in the instrument cluster of your vehicle.To find out more, please refer also to the corre-sponding chapter in the owner’s manual.Operating lists using voice controlScrolling in a listYou can scroll through any list using the com-mands “scroll down” and “scroll up”.Voice-controlled listsIf you see the symbol to the right of a list entry, it means that the list is voice controllable.You have the following options for selecting a row in voice-controlled lists:ûSaying the contents as they are displayed in the row.- or - ûSay the command “line number”, directly fol-lowed by the number you see on the right end of the row.Non-voice-controlled listsWith non-voice-controlled lists, you can only select a row using the row number.ûSay the command “line number”, directly fol-lowed by the number you see on the right end of the row.Reading out list contentsIn voice-controlled lists you can have the list con-tents read out. The PCM starts with the highlighted list row and reads out the list down to the last row. ûSay the command “read out”.
Voice control 179Operating examplesThe voice control system is designed so that you can say each menu item shown on the display. If you activate the “Show hints” function, exceptions are indicated by an appropriate message on the display of the PCM. The PCM also shows you the most relevant com-mands possible at that time as soon as you are prompted to enter a command. To find out more, please refer to the section “Configuring the voice control system” on page 176.Due to the large number of control options, we have chosen to provide a number of operating ex-amples on the following pages instead of a full list-ing of all voice-controlled functions.Operating example for radio modeCalling up radio mode and switching wavebandûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Tuner”.;“Tuner”.The PCM switches to radio mode if another mode was active prior to the command being entered. If radio mode was already active, the waveband is switched.Selecting the preset memoryYou can select a preset memory directly. Do this by saying the command “preset memory FM 1”, for example.Tuning to a currently receivable FM stationIf you know the currently receivable FM stations and if radio mode is your active audio source, you can tune to the station you want by saying its name.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Station BBC Radio 3”.;“Station KCRW”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.Tuning to stored FM stations You can either say the name of a stored station from the FM main menu or the number of the cor-responding memory location.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Station BBC Radio 3”.;“Station KCRW”.
180 Voice control- or - ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Station number 1”.;“Station number 1”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.Tuning to stored AM stations You can say the memory location of a stored sta-tion from the AM main menu.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Station number 1”.;“Station number 1”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.Entering a frequencyYou can also tune to FM and AM stations by enter-ing the frequency. The frequency input menu only accepts frequencies within the given waveband:– FM waveband: 87.5 - 108.0 MHz, with 0.5 MHz increments. – AM waveband: 531 kHz - 1620 kHz, with 1 kHz increments.Example for entering the frequency 98.4 MHz in the FM waveband:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Manual tune”.;“Manual tune”.The display switches to the frequency input menu.;“Please say the desired frequency”.Beep Ò y“Ninety-eight point four”.;“Frequency Ninety-eight point four megahertz”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding frequen-cy; the frequency input menu stays open.With the command “frequency” directly fol-lowed by the MHz frequency you want, you can enter a frequency without the display changing to the frequency input menu.Station searchYou can use the commands “next station” and “previous station” to start the station search in the FM or AM waveband. The search scans upwards or downwards and automatically stops at the next receivable station.Automatic station search (autostore)The automatic station search fills the memory of the preset memory currently selected with the six stations with the strongest reception signal at the present time.Any stations that have already been stored (e.g. manually stored) are overwritten.This function is not available for preset memories BEST FM and MIXED.Example for entering an autostore in the preset memory FM1:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Autostore FM1”.;“Autostore FM1”.The PCM starts the function.Starting/stopping the scan functionIf you activate this function, each station found within the frequency range will be played for ap-prox. 5 seconds.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Start scan”.
Voice control 181;“Start scan”.The PCM plays the stations one after the other.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Stop scan”.;“Stop scan”.The PCM tunes to the station currently playing.Switching the traffic programme on/offSwitch the traffic programme on and off using “set TP” and “deactivate set TP”.Tuning to stations from the station listThe station list is available in the FM waveband and contains all currently receivable stations.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Station list”.;“Station list”.The station list is displayed.ûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the station you want. The following two options are available to you for tuning to a station:y“Station BBC Radio 3”.;“Station BBC Radio 3”.The PCM tunes to the station BBC Radio 3.- or - y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.You can also tune to a station from the station list directly without calling up the list first. Say the “Station” command, directly followed by the name of the station as it appears in the list.The station list is a voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section “Operating lists using voice control” on page 178.Operating example for TV tunerCalling up TV mode ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Tuner TV”.;“Tuner TV”.The PCM switches to TV mode.Selecting the preset memoryYou can select a preset memory directly. Do this by saying the command “preset memory TV 1”, for example.Station searchYou can use the commands “next station” or “pre-vious station” to start the station search. The search scans upwards or downwards and auto-matically stops at the next receivable station.
182 Voice controlTuning to stations from the station listThe station list contains all the stations that can currently be received.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Read out station list”.;“Read out station list”.The stations are read out one after the other.The following two options are available to you for tuning to a station:y“Station BBC1”.;“Station BBC1”.The PCM tunes to BBC1.- or - y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.Calling up video text pagesûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Video text”.;“Video text”.Video text appears.The following two options are available to you for opening a video text page:y“next page”.;“next page”.The PCM opens the page.- or - y“Page 333”.;“Page 333”.The PCM opens the corresponding page.Operating example for CD/DVD modeCalling up CD/DVD modeûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Disc”.;“Disc”.The PCM switches to disc mode.Selecting a track from the track listThe track list contains all the tracks on the CD/DVD currently being played.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Track list”.;“Track list”.The track list is displayed.Selecting a track from the track list:ûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the track you want. y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.The PCM plays the corresponding track.If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/DVD, the track list shows the names of the root directories as well as the subdirectories. You can also choose folders and playlists us-ing the “line number” command, directly fol-lowed by the corresponding number.The track list is a non-voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section “Operating lists using voice con-trol” on page 178.
Voice control 183Choosing a track by skippingYou can skip to the previous or next track using the “previous track” and “next track” commands respectively.Choosing a track by entering the track numberYou can select a track directly in CD/DVD mode using the “track number” or “track” command, di-rectly followed by the corresponding number.Choosing a disc using the disc listThe disc list contains all available CDs/DVDs.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Disc selection”.;“Disc selection”.The disc list is displayed.;“Please say the number of the required disc”.y“Disc number 3”.;“Disc number 3”.The PCM plays the corresponding CD/DVD.The disc list is a non-voice-controlled list; to find out more about this please refer also to the section “Operating lists using voice con-trol” on page 178.Choosing a CD/DVD by entering the disc numberYou can select a specific disc directly using the “Disc number” command, directly followed by the corresponding number.Repeating a trackWhen this function is activated, the current track or chapter (video DVD mode) is repeated. Activate and deactivate the repeat function using the “activate repeat” and “deactivate repeat” com-mands. Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen this function is activated, the PCM plays the tracks on the disc currently playing in random or-der.Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using the “activate shuffle” and “deactivate shuffle” com-mands.Scanning tracksWhen this function is activated, the PCM plays a brief snippet of each track on the disc currently playing in sequence.Start and stop the scan function using the “Start scan” and “Stop scan” commands. Operating example for iPod modeCalling up iPod modeûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Disc iPod”.;“Disc iPod”.The PCM switches to iPod mode.
184 Voice controlSelecting a track from the track listûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Track list”.;“Track list”.The track list is displayed.The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.Selecting a track from the track list:ûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the track you want. y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.The PCM plays the corresponding track.Choosing a track by skippingYou can skip to the previous or next track using the “previous track” and “next track” commands respectively.Choosing a track by entering the track numberYou can select a track directly in iPod mode using the “track number” or “track” command, directly followed by the corresponding number.Repeating a trackActivating this function repeats the current track. Activate and deactivate the repeat function using the “activate repeat” and “deactivate repeat” com-mands. Switching the shuffle function on/offWhen this function is activated, the PCM plays the tracks in the track list in random order.Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using the “activate shuffle” and “deactivate shuffle” com-mands.Searching for musicYou can start a music search in iPod mode based on the following criteria:–Artists,–albums,–track and– music genres.Below is an example of how to perform a search for the tracks of a specific artist.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Find music”.;“Find music”.y“Artists”.;“Artists”.A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored on the iPod is displayed.ûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the track you want. y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.y“activate repeat”.The PCM plays the corresponding track.
Voice control 185Operating example for telephone mode Calling up telephone modeûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Telephone”.;“Telephone”.The PCM switches to telephone mode.Entering the PINThe digits “zero” to “nine” are permitted when en-tering the PIN. The following two options are avail-able to you when saying the digits:– Say all digits in a single block without a pause.– Group and say the individual digits in blocks, for example the first three digits and then the next three digits. Leave a pause after each block and wait until the PCM has repeated the digits from the last block entered before say-ing the next block.If you say the digits in blocks, you can use the “correction” command to delete the last block. The PCM then repeats the last correct block and you can continue with your input. You can delete the complete entry using the “de-lete” command.If you are saying all the digits without a pause, both these commands delete the complete entry.ûActivate voice control in the PIN input menu (see above).;“The PIN, please.”.Beep Ò y“One two three four”.WARNING!Injury hazard. In emergency situations, stress may cause your voice to change to an extent where it might take longer than normal to establish a telephone connection.ûDo not use the voice control system in cas-es of emergency. Injury hazard. The telephone must not be used near explosives or flammable materials (e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations in-volving explosives.Mobile phones must be switched off in certain hazardous areas such as near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition work in progress using explosives, for exam-ple. They can interfere with technical equip-ment.ûPlease heed appropriate warnings.ûObserve statutory regulations and local re-strictions when using the telephone.
186 Voice control;“One two three four”.Beep Ò y“Ok”.;“Checking the PIN”.The PCM switches to telephone mode if the en-tered PIN is correct.Entering a telephone numberThe digits “zero” to “nine” as well as the following words are permitted when entering the digits:– “Star” for the * character– “hash” for the # character– “plus” for the + characterWhen calling international telephone numbers, use the word “plus” at the beginning of the number, fol-lowed by the country code. Then enter the local area code without the first digit, and then the tele-phone number.The following two options are available to you when saying the telephone number:– Say all digits in a single block without a pause.– Say the telephone number in blocks, leaving a pause after each block and waiting until the PCM has repeated the digits from the last block entered before saying the next block.If you say the telephone number in blocks, you can use the “correction” command to delete the last block. The PCM then repeats the last correct block and you can continue with your input.The “delete” command deletes the complete en-try.If you are saying all the digits without a pause, both these commands delete the complete entry.If you try to enter more than 32 digits, you will hear an announcement that the number is too long and that the last input has been deleted.Example for an overseas call to Germany:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Dial number”.;“Dial number.”Beep Òy“plus four nine”.;“Plus four nine”.Beep Ò y“Seven two four eight”.;“Seven two four eight”.Beep Ò y“Seven one zero”.;“Seven one zero”.Beep Ò y“Call number”.;“Dialling the number.”The PCM dials the number.The “Dial number” command is a global com-mand and therefore also works in other modes (e. g. navigation mode). You will find other global commands in the section “Global commands” on page 173.Calling up the phonebookûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Phonebook”.;“Phonebook”.The phonebook is displayed as a list.
Voice control 187Calling a phonebook entryûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the en-try you want. The following two options are available to you for making a call to an entry:1. Say the “Call” command, directly followed by the name of the entry.This option is global and also works outside the phonebook.2. Say the command “line number”, directly followed by the corresponding number shown on the right end of the row.This option is not global and only works within the phonebook. Furthermore, unlike option 1, it does not result in direct dialling of the telephone number.If you are saying the name of a phonebook en-try, please note the following:ûSay the name as normal, do not spell it out.ûIf the name of a phonebook entry is in a language other than that currently set in the PCM, the voice control system may not recognise it correctly.With phonebook entries with multiple num-bers, the entry can also be directly selected by additionally speaking the category (e.g. “Mr. Smith Office”). If the specified cate-gory does not exist for this entry, the available categories are announced.Example for option 1:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Call Information”.;“Dialing the number of Information.”The PCM dials the number.Example for option 2:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.The details for the corresponding phonebook entry are displayed.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Call number”.;“Call number.”.“Dialling the number.”.The PCM dials the number.Assigning a voice entry for an entry in the phonebookThe command “Change pronunciation” can be used to store speech entries for entries in the tel-ephone book of your telephone. You can use these voice entries to make a call without having to enter the other person’s number.
188 Voice controlTo store a voice entry, you must first select an en-try in the phonebook containing both a name and a telephone number.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Change pronunciation”.;“Change pronunciation. Please say a name.” Beep Ò y“Mr. Smith”.;“Please say the name a second time.”Beep Òy“Mr. Smith”.;“The pronunciation Mr. Smith has been stored.” The voice entry has been stored for the entry in the phonebook. The command “delete pronunciation” is used to delete an existing speech entry.List of previous callsThe “Previous calls” menu provides you access to a list of the telephone numbers you have recently dialled. You can select a list entry using voice con-trol and call it again. ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Previous calls”.;“Previous calls”.The list of previous calls is displayed.To find out how to select a list entry and make a call, please refer to the section “Calling a phone-book entry” on page 187.List of received calls The “Received calls” menu provides you access to a list of the calls you have recently received. You can select a list entry using voice control and call it back. ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Received calls”.;“Received calls”.The list of received calls is displayed.To find out how to select a list entry and make a call, please refer to the section “Calling a phone-book entry” on page 187.Reading out text messages(with PCM telephone only)You can use the “read out messages” command to skip to the list of text messages and have the mes-sage headers read out.ûTo have the contents of a text message that is highlighted in the list read out, say the “read out details” command.ûTo have the contents of an open text message read out, say the “read out” command.
Voice control 189Operating example for navigation modeCalling up navigation modeûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Navigation”.;“Navigation”.The PCM switches to navigation mode.Entering an address and starting route guidanceIf the language set in the PCM and the language spoken at the destination are the same, you can say the country, town, and street as whole words.If the two languages are not the same, you must spell the town and the street. This applies to des-tinations in countries with more than one official language and to destinations in other countries.If route guidance had previously been started, the country is already preset. In this case, the address entry starts with the prompt “Please say the town”.If you would like to set another country, you must start the dialogue with the “input coun-try” command.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“enter address”.;“enter address”.“Please say the town”.Beep Ò y“Stuttgart”.;“Please say the street”.Beep Ò y“Porschestraße”.If the named town and street were uniquely identified by the voice control system when entered for the first time, the next step is skipped and you can proceed directly to entry of the house number.A list of towns and/or a list of streets is dis-played if necessary.;“Please make your selection”.Beep Ò ûScroll through the list in this case using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the town you want.y“Line number 3”.If you are unable to find the destination you want in the town or street list, you can repeat your entry by selecting the “correction” com-mand.;“Stuttgart, Porschestraße”.“Would you like to input a street number?”Beep Ò y“Yes”.;“Please say the street number”.Beep Ò y“One hundred and thirty two”.;“One hundred and thirty two”.“Would you like to start route guidance?”Beep Ò y“Yes”.The PCM calculates the route.If you want to start route guidance in the cen-tre of a town, begin the dialogue with the “in-put town” command. Then select the town and respond to the request for the street by saying the “Start route guidance” command.
190 Voice controlEntering a destination from the list of previous destinations or from the personal destination memoryThe “Previous destinations” menu provides you ac-cess to a list of the last destinations to which you started route guidance.In the “Stored destinations” menu you will find the destinations you have stored in your personal des-tination memory.Both lists are voice-controlled lists, to find out more about this please refer also to the sec-tion “Operating lists using voice control” on page 178.If you want to transfer a row to the voice con-trol system by saying the contents, please note also the following: – You can say all other row contents as they are displayed. If the voice control system has difficulty understanding the contents, we recommend saying the number of the re-spective row.– Both lists can contain rows with geographi-cal coordinates. Example: “8° 55’ 32’’ E 48° 51’ 5’’ N”. You cannot select these rows by saying their contents; you must say the row number.û û û– You can store traces in the personal desti-nation memory. When doing so, the PCM suggests a name. You cannot select rows with these default names by saying their contents.If you name the trace yourself, however, you can select the row by saying its con-tents.– If you know the name of the destination, you can start route guidance directly using the “go to destination ...*” command.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Previous destinations”.;“Previous destinations”.- or - y“Stored destinations”.;“Stored destinations”.The list of previous destinations or the person-al destination memory is displayed.ûScroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the destination you want. The following two options are available to you for starting route guidance to a destination:1. Say the row contents shown on the display.2. Say the “line number” command, directly followed by the corresponding number of the row, which shown at its right end.Example for option 1:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Porschestraße”.The details for the list entry are displayed.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Òy“Start route guidance”.;“Start route guidance”.The PCM calculates the route to the destina-tion.
Voice control 191Example for option 2:ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.ûActivate voice control.y“Start route guidance”.;“Start route guidance”.The PCM calculates the route to the destina-tion.Searching for points of interestThe “POI” menu provides you with access to points of interest such as petrol stations, parking areas, restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for exam-ple.The points of interest are divided into different cat-egories to make them easier for you to find.With the voice control system, you can select a point of interest by entering the category and sub-category as well as the search area.Below you will see an example for entering a point of interest in the vicinity of the vehicle. ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“POI”.;“POI”.The points of interest menu is displayed.;“Please select the category”.Beep Ò The category list is displayed.Scroll through the list using the commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” commands until you find the category you want. The categories, like the subcategories also, can all be spoken. You can, however, also say the number of the line containing the category you want. The row number is at the right of the row.y“Line number 5”.;“Line 5”.The subcategory list is displayed.;“Please make your selection”.Beep Ò y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3”.“Where would you like to search?”.Beep ÒYou see the menu for the search areas. The en-tered subcategory or the entered marker is shown on the left beside the “Category” menu item.You can now enter the search area in which the PCM is to search for points of interest.y“Vehicle surroundings”.;“Vehicle surroundings accepted. Please select the destination”.A list containing the possible points of interest is displayed.y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3.Would you like to start route guidance?”.y“Yes”.The PCM calculates the route to the point of inter-est.Searching for a point of interest with a known category and search areaYou can shorten the input for a search for a point of interest by grouping the subcategory and search area in a single command, for example.
192 Voice controlûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Point of interest golf course near destination”.The result list for the search is displayed.;“Please select the destination”.Beep Ò y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3.Would you like to start route guidance?”.y“Yes”.The PCM calculates the route to the point of inter-est.Searching for a point of interest along a routeIf route guidance is active, you can search the planned route for a point of interest using the “along route” command.If route guidance is not active, you can instead search for a specific point of interest using the “in surroundings” command.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Search petrol station along route”.The result list for the search is displayed.;“Please select the destination”.Beep Ò y“Line number 3”.;“Line 3.Would you like to start route guidance?”.y“Yes”.Route guidance to the selected point of interest is started.Announcing traffic messages on the routeThis function is only available during active route guidance.ûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Read out traffic messages on route”.;“Read out traffic messages on route”.The list of traffic messages on the route is dis-played.;“A 8 direction... ”The list of traffic messages on the route is read out, beginning with the first entry. The traffic message currently being read is highlighted.You can also use the “read out details” com-mand to read out the details of a traffic mes-sage as soon as it is highlighted in the list.Operating example for mapCalling up the map viewûActivate voice control.;Beep Ò y“Map”.;“Map”.The PCM switches to the map view.Setting the map scaleYou can say all of the available map scales or dis-play your total route on the map using the “total route” command.
Voice control 193Setting 3D displayIf this function is activated, a three-dimensional map view is shown.You can activate and deactivate the function using the “activate birds eye view” and “deactivate birds eye view” commands.Displaying traffic messagesWhen this function is activated, traffic information is also shown in the map view.Activate and deactivate the function using the “ac-tivate show traffic” and “deactivate show traffic” commands.Setting autozoomIf you have activated this function, the entire cur-rent route section is displayed. Activate and deactivate the function using the “ac-tivate autozoom” and “deactivate autozoom” com-mands.Setting the map orientationYou can change the orientation of the map using the following commands:– “activate north orientation”, – “deactivate north orientation”, – “show destination” and – “show location”.Repeating a navigation announcementIf you say the “guidance announcement” com-mand during active route guidance, the last navi-gation announcement is repeated.
Index 194IndexAAAC-LC ...................................................................35Accepting a call................................................ 58, 74Activating alternative routes for route guidance ............143Activating the entry aid.............................................137Activating the interface ...................................... 47, 48Activating the rain sensor .........................................136Activating the rear wiper...........................................137Adapting the volume for an external audio source ...........47Adding destinations to the personal destination memory 147Alternative frequencies...............................................25Answer button ..........................................................12Area search ...........................................................151Assigning a key ......................................................123Audio formats...........................................................35Audio sourceDisplaying detailed information .........................111Selecting ..........................................................8Automatic call answering............................................95Automatic station search in radio mode ........................24Automatic station search in TV mode............................28Autostore (radio).......................................................24Autostore (TV) ..........................................................28AUX........................................................................47Activating the interface .....................................47Adapting the volume .........................................47Switching to an external audio source..................47AUX BT ...................................................................48Activating the interface .....................................48Fast forward/reverse........................................49Repeating a track.............................................49Shuffle function................................................49Skipping tracks................................................49Starting/stopping scanning................................49Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source .48Avoiding a stretch of road ........................................155BBack button .............................................................11Best FM ..................................................................23Best FM preset memory.............................................23Bluetooth® ..............................................................54Adding a new device ..........50, 68, 97, 125, 133, 150Authorised devices ...............50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150Calling up Bluetooth® settings .............49, 124, 133, 149Connecting an authorised device with the PCM........50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150Deleting an authorised device from the list ................50, 67, 96, 125, 134, 150Deleting the list of authorised devices ...............50, 67, 96, 126, 134, 150Disconnecting an authorised and connected device from the PCM ........................................67Displaying authorised devices ...............50, 67, 95, 125, 133, 150Displaying details for the authorised device..51, 68, 97, 126, 134, 150Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device.................50, 57, 69, 125, 133, 150Renaming an authorised device.................50, 67, 96, 125, 133, 150Setting the profile of the authorised device ...........96Setting visibility.....50, 69, 98, 125, 133, 150Settings (external Bluetooth® audio source) .........49Settings (logbook)..........................................124Settings (navigation) .......................................149Settings (Sport display) ...................................133Settings (telephone).................................. 67, 95Switching Bluetooth® on/off ................................49, 125, 133, 149Switching on/off ..............................................56Brightness of the display ............................................19Buttons .....................................................................9CCall forwarding .........................................................93Call settings.............................................................93Call volume ..............................................................66Call waiting ................................ 64, 65, 81, 82, 94Accepting a call ....................................... 64, 82Ending a connected call ............................ 64, 82Rejecting a call ........................................ 64, 81CallingDialling a number ..................................... 60, 75Number from the list of previous calls.......... 61, 78Number from the list of received calls.......... 62, 79Phonebook entry...................................... 61, 76Calling a destination from the personal destination memory.................................................148Calling the destination..............................................146Cancelling a block...................................................154Cancelling a detour .................................................154CD/DVDCalling up the CD/DVD changer menu..................36Calling up the main menu...................................37Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ...........36Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive) ...............36Ejecting all CD/DVDs (with CD/DVD changer) ........37Fast forward/reverse........................................39Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ...........36Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive)................36Loading all CDs/DVDs (with empty CD/DVD changer) ............................36Naming a CD...................................................38Repeating a track.............................................39Searching for a track (MP3 CD) ..........................39Searching for music (MP3 CD)............................39Selecting a CD/DVD .........................................37Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode................38Selecting a track..............................................37Selecting a track (MP3 CD) ................................37Setting DVD audio groups..................................38Setting the DVD audio format .............................38Setting the mode .............................................37Skipping to the next track..................................39
Index 195Starting/stopping scanning................................39Switching the shuffle function on/off....................39Changing the PIN ......................................................92Colour (TV)...............................................................32Conducting calls with the hands-free unit ............... 58, 73Conference...................................................... 65, 82Configuring the display...............................................18Contrast..................................................................32Controls ....................................................................9Copyright ................................................................34Cordless handset....................................................101Accepting a call .............................................102Call waiting (swapping) and conference ..............103Charging ......................................................101Dialling a number ...........................................102Ending a call .................................................102Establishing an additional call ...........................102Muting the microphone ...................................102Phonebook ...................................................104Rejecting a call ..............................................102Settings .......................................................107Switching on/off ............................................101Text messages (SMS) .....................................105Creating a template for SMS.......................................90DDeleting ..................................................................11Authorised Bluetooth device ...50, 67, 96, 125, 134, 150Contact person (logbook) ................................123Contents of the SIM card...................................77Destination (list of previous destinations) ............145Destinations from the personal destination memory........................................148Driver (logbook) .............................................123Key assignment in the logbook .........................123Lap in the Sport display recording.....................130List of authorised Bluetooth devices .50, 67, 96, 126, 134, 150Phonebook entry..............................................77Recording in the Sport display..........................130Reference lap for the Sport display ...................131Stopovers.....................................................157Telephone number .....................61, 62, 78, 79Text message (SMS).........................................87Trip destination (logbook) ................................123Trip purpose (logbook) ....................................123Trips in the logbook........................................123vCards ...........................................................89Deleting a destination (list of previous destinations) .......145Deleting a destination (personal destination memory).....148Deleting a lap (Sport display).....................................130Deleting characters ...................................................11Deleting entered characters........................................11Destination input using geographical coordinates..........158Destination input using the map .................................158Dialling a number (telephone) .............................. 60, 75Direct dialling ................................................... 60, 75Display....................................................................12Cleaning ...........................................................7Colour touchscreen ..........................................12Faults...............................................................7Operating .......................................................12Switching back on ............................................18Switching off ...................................................18Display faults..............................................................7Displaying destination/location ..................................167Displaying detailed information about the audio source ..111Displaying driving instructions in the map view..............170Displaying route sections..........................................111Displaying sections of the route.................................168Displaying speed limits in the map display ...................169Displaying the footer in the map view..........................170Displaying the north arrow in the map view ..................170Displaying the satellite image in the map view ..............169Displaying the system version .....................................19Displaying the total route in the map...........................167Displaying traffic messages (TMC)..............................109Displaying traffic messages in the map view ................170Dolby® Digital ..........................................................35DTMF tones ..................................................... 63, 80DTS ........................................................................35EEditingAddress of a destination (list of previous destinations) ............................145Address of a destination (personal destination memory)..........................147Data from the current trip (logbook)...................120Destination name of a personal destination .........148Phonebook entry..............................................77Editing an address (list of previous destinations) ...........145Editing an address (personal destination memory).........147Ejecting a CD ...........................................................11Ejecting a DVD..........................................................11Ejecting CDs/DVDs....................................................36Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) ..............................30Emergency call .........................................................83End call button..........................................................11Ending a call..................................................... 59, 74Ending a lap (Sport display).......................................129Entering a name........................................................14Entering a space.......................................................14Entering an address.................................................141Entering an address (list of previous destinations) .........145Entering an address (personal destination memory).......147Entering the country ................................................142Entering the junction ................................................143Entering the postal code...........................................142Entering the street ..................................................142Entering the street number .......................................142Entering the town ....................................................142Establishing an additional call .............................. 63, 81Extended memory ...................................................135External audio source (AUX) ........................................47Activating the interface......................................47Switching to an external audio source ..................47External Bluetooth® audio sourceActivating the interface......................................48Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source..48External Bluetooth® audio source (AUX BT) ...................48FFast forward/reverse .......................... 39, 42, 46, 49Finding the cordless handset.......................................98Format ....................................................................32Forward/reverseAUX BT...........................................................49CD/DVD .........................................................39iPod...............................................................42USB...............................................................46Frequency entry ........................................................23
196 IndexGGeographical coordinates ........................................ 158GPS antenna.......................................................... 140HHelp function for the voice control system .................. 177Holding a call (telephone) ....................................60, 76IIMEI ....................................................................... 92Individual settings (extended memory) ........................ 135Input menuOperating input menus ..................................... 14Setting the layout ............................................ 15InterfaceAUX .............................................................. 47iPod .............................................................. 40USB .............................................................. 43iPod ....................................................................... 40Calling up the main menu .................................. 40Fast forward/reverse ....................................... 42Playlists ......................................................... 41Repeating a track ............................................ 42Searching for a track ....................................... 40Shuffle function ............................................... 42Skipping to the next track ................................. 42Switching to iPod mode .................................... 40Track list........................................................ 42iPod interface .......................................................... 40JJack for iPod ........................................................... 40LLandmark navigation ............................................... 160Left rotary knob ....................................................... 10Lift handset button.................................................... 12List of previous calls ..........................................61, 78Adding to a number ..................................62, 79Calling a number ...................................... 61, 78Deleting a number ....................................61, 78Displaying the list .....................................61, 78Sending a message to a number from the list ....... 78Storing a number in the phonebook..................... 78List of previous destinations ..................................... 144List of received calls ..........................................62, 79Adding to a number from the list .................63, 80Calling a number from the list .....................62, 79Deleting a number from the list ...................62, 79Displaying the list .....................................62, 79Sending a message to a number from the list ....... 80Storing a number from the list in the phonebook ... 79ListsOperating using voice control .......................... 178Showing the first letters of the entries ................. 13Loading a disc ......................................................... 36Loading CDs/DVDs ................................................... 36Location information ............................................... 111Logbook ............................................................... 119Activating/deactivating ................................... 119Activating/deactivating the reminder ................. 119Assigning a key ............................................. 123Changing the contact person ........................... 121Changing the driver........................................ 120Changing the remarks .................................... 121Changing the trip destination ........................... 120Changing the trip purpose ............................... 121Changing the trip type .................................... 120Continuing recording ...................................... 121Creating a contact person............................... 122Creating a driver............................................ 122Creating a new contact person......................... 121Creating a new driver ..................................... 120Creating a new trip destination......................... 120Creating a new trip purpose ............................ 121Creating a trip destination ............................... 122Creating a trip purpose................................... 122Deleting a contact person ............................... 123Deleting a driver............................................ 123Deleting a key assignment............................... 123Deleting a trip destination................................ 123Deleting a trip purpose ................................... 123Deleting trips ................................................ 123Editing data from the current trip...................... 120Managing lists............................................... 122Renaming a contact person ............................. 122Renaming a driver.......................................... 122Renaming a trip destination ............................. 122Renaming a trip purpose ................................. 122Setting the standard trip ................................. 119Storing a refuelling stop.................................. 122Transferring data ........................................... 124Viewing the list of stored trips .......................... 122Lowering the exterior mirror ..................................... 137MMaking a detour around a route section ...................... 153Manual frequency entry.............................................. 23MAP ..................................................................... 166Adapting the map view.................................... 169Changing the scale ........................................ 166Display of the total route ................................. 167Displaying a 3D terrain model .......................... 169Displaying a 3D town model............................. 169Displaying destination/location......................... 167Displaying driving instructions in the map view .... 170Displaying sections of the route........................ 168Displaying the footer ...................................... 170Displaying the map menu ................................ 170Displaying the north arrow............................... 170Displaying the satellite image ........................... 169Displaying traffic messages ............................. 170Moving......................................................... 166Orienting the map to the north ......................... 170Selecting display of the arrival time................... 170Setting 3D display.......................................... 166Setting 3D points of interest ............................ 169Setting a 3D map........................................... 169Setting autozoom .......................................... 167Setting display of the arrival time...................... 170Setting the colours for the map ........................ 170Setting the display layout ................................ 168Setting the display of speed limits..................... 169Setting the junction zoom................................ 169Memory buttons ....................................................... 22Meridian Lossless Packing ......................................... 35Microphone volume ................................................... 66MIXED .................................................................... 23MIXED preset memory ............................................... 23
Index 197MP3 .......................................................................35MP3 CDSearching for a track........................................39Searching for music .........................................39Selecting a track..............................................37Muting (audio source) ..................................................8Muting (telephone)............................................. 58, 73Muting the microphone (telephone)....................... 58, 73NNavigationActivating alternative routes.............................143Adding destinations (personal destination memory)..........................147Area search ..................................................151Avoiding a stretch of road ...............................155Calling a destination from the personal destination memory........................................148Calling the destination.....................................146Deleting a destination ........................... 145, 148Destination input using geographical coordinates.158Destination input using the map ........................158Displaying the location of a destination (list of previous destinations)............................145Displaying the location of a destination (personal destination memory)..........................147Editing an address (list of previous destinations)..145Editing an address (personal destination memory)147Editing the name of a personal destination..........148Entering an address .......................................141Entering an address from the list of previous destinations......................................145Entering an address from the personal destination memory........................................147Entering the country .......................................142Entering the junction.......................................143Entering the street and number ........................142Entering the town/postal code..........................142Entering/editing a telephone number for a destination in the personal destination memory ...148General operation ..........................................140List of previous destinations.............................144Personal destination memory ...........................146Points of interest ...........................................151Reloading data ..............................................164Safety notice.................................................141Sending a destination from the personal destination memory........................................149Setting a detour.............................................153Setting the volume of the announcement ............141Starting route guidance...................................143Starting route guidance with route alternatives activated ......................................143Stopovers.....................................................155Stopping route guidance .................................143Storing a destination (off-road navigation) ...........158Storing a destination from the list of previous destinations in the personal destination memory ..145Storing a position (off-road navigation) ...............159Network selection .....................................................91OOff-road navigation ..................................................159Activating/deactivating....................................160Landmark navigation.......................................160Recording a trip section (trace).........................161Safety notice.................................................160Storing a destination.......................................158Storing a position...........................................159Tracing a route ..............................................163Opening the CD/DVD changer menu .............................11Opening the changer menu .........................................11Opening the rear blind automatically ...........................137Operating ..................................................................9Operating lever for the on-board computer ..................175Options for route guidance .......................................153Orienting the map to the north...................................170PParkAssist .............................................................114Closing the display .........................................115Switching the display on/off .............................115Parking with the rear view camera display ...................117Performing voice adaptation for the voice control system ...............................................177Personal destinations...............................................146Personal Identification Number (PIN) .............................73Personal trip data....................................................113Phonebook....................................................... 60, 76Calling an entry........................................ 61, 76Creating and storing an entry .............................76Deleting an entry..............................................77Deleting the contents of the SIM card ..................77Deleting the phonebook........................... 71, 100Editing an entry................................................77Sending a vCard ...................................... 61, 77Setting automatic transfer ......................... 70, 99Setting sorting......................................... 70, 99Setting the storage location ....................... 70, 98Settings..........................................................70Transferring .......................................... 71, 100Transferring the phonebook entries manually.........71Picture format ..........................................................32Picture settings for TV mode .......................................31PIN .........................................................................73Pin Unblocking Key (PUK)............................................73Playlists (iPod) ..........................................................41Points of interest.....................................................151Searching by category ....................................151Searching by name.........................................152Searching by telephone number........................152Searching in the map view ...............................152Previous calls ................................................... 61, 78Previous destinations (navigation)...............................144PTY filter .................................................................26PUK ........................................................................73RRadio ......................................................................22PTY filter.........................................................26RDS ...............................................................25Setting the mode .............................................22Storing stations on station buttons ......................23Traffic programme ...........................................24Tuning to stations.............................................22RDS ........................................................................25Switching radio text on/off.................................25Switching RDS on/off........................................25Switching regionalisation on or off.......................25Rear view camera ...................................................116Parking with the display ...................................117Picture settings..............................................117Switching on grid lines ....................................117
198 IndexSwitching the display on/off ............................ 116Received calls...................................................62, 79Recording (Sport display)Continuing.................................................... 128Deleting ....................................................... 130Evaluating .................................................... 129Renaming..................................................... 130Starting ....................................................... 127Stopping...................................................... 128Recording a trip section (trace)................................. 161Recording laps (Sport display) .................................. 127Redialling ..................................................60, 75, 95Reference lap (Sport display)Defining ....................................................... 131Deleting ....................................................... 131Renaming..................................................... 131Resetting ..................................................... 131Regional code.......................................................... 35Rejecting a call ................................................. 59, 75Reloading data....................................................... 164Reloading navigation data ........................................ 164RenamingContact person (logbook)................................ 122Driver (logbook) ............................................ 122Recording (Sport display) ................................ 130Reference lap (Sport display) ........................... 131Trip destination (logbook)................................ 122Trip purpose (logbook) ................................... 122Repeating (track) ...................................................... 39Repeating a trackAUX BT.......................................................... 49CD/DVD......................................................... 39iPod .............................................................. 42USB .............................................................. 46Resetting personal settings ........................................ 20Resetting settings..................................................... 20Resetting trip data .................................................. 114Restoring factory settings .......................................... 20Restoring vehicle handover settings............................. 20Right rotary knob...................................................... 11Ringtone type ...................................................66, 91Ringtone volume................................................66, 91RouteDisplaying sections ........................................ 111Route alternatives................................................... 143SSafety notice (navigation) ......................................... 141Scanning (radio mode)............................................... 23Searching for a trackiPod .............................................................. 40MP3 CD ......................................................... 39USB .............................................................. 44Searching for musicMP3 CD ......................................................... 39USB .............................................................. 44Sections of the route............................................... 111Selecting a chapter (video DVD mode).......................... 38Selecting a trackCD/DVD......................................................... 37MP3 CD ......................................................... 37Selecting display of the arrival time in the map view...... 170Sending a destination from the personal destination memory ................................................ 149Sending own number................................................. 95Setting3D map display ............................................. 166Adaptation of the central vents......................... 138Air flow strength ............................................ 138AudioPilot....................................................... 16Automatic air circulation.................................. 138Automatic call answering .................................. 95Balance ......................................................... 15Bass ............................................................. 15Brightness (rear view camera).......................... 117Brightness (TV)................................................ 31Brightness of the display................................... 19Call forwarding................................................ 93Cancelling a detour ........................................ 154Colour (rear view camera) ............................... 118Colour (TV) ..................................................... 32Colours for the display...................................... 18Comfort options ............................................ 137Contents of the personal display....................... 113Contrast (rear view camera) ............................ 118Contrast (TV) .................................................. 32Day design ..................................................... 18Daytime running lights .................................... 135Display .......................................................... 18Display layout in the map view.......................... 168Displaying the total route in the map display ....... 167DVD audio format ............................................ 38DVD audio groups............................................ 38Dynamic route planning................................... 154Entry aid ...................................................... 137Fade-out time ................................................ 135Fade-out time for the interior lights.................... 136Fader............................................................. 15Fast/short route ............................................ 154Folding in of the exterior mirrors....................... 137Headlight alignment (driving on left/right) ........... 136Keyboard layout .............................................. 15Language ....................................................... 19Language for voice control.............................. 175Layout of the input menu ................................... 15Layout of the letters on the keyboard in the input menu ............................................. 15Light options................................................. 135Loudness ................................................16, 17Lowering of the exterior mirror......................... 137Making a detour around a section ..................... 153Mode (AUX BT) ................................................ 48Mode (AUX)..................................................... 47Mode (CD/DVD) ............................................... 37Mode (iPod) .................................................... 40Mode (radio) ................................................... 22Mode (TV)....................................................... 27Mode (USB) .................................................... 44Night design ................................................... 18Opening of the rear blind................................. 137Options for air conditioning.............................. 137Orientation light ............................................. 136Preset memory ............................................... 23Rain sensor .................................................. 136Rear wiper.................................................... 137Reception country (TV)...................................... 31Ringtone type.................................................. 91Ringtone volume.............................................. 91SDV (speed-dependent volume) .......................... 16Sorting criteria for the station list........................ 26Sorting of the station list (TV) ............................. 31Sound conditioner............................................ 16Station (radio) ................................................. 22Station (TV)..................................................... 27Surround.................................................16, 17Switching the touchscreen on/off ....................... 19Treble............................................................ 15
Index 199Units...................................................... 18, 19Use of the upper ventilation zone ......................138Volume.............................................................8Volume of the navigation announcement.............141Volume of the traffic programme announcements .. 25Wiper options ................................................136Setting a block for a route section .............................153Setting a detour......................................................153Setting a fast/quick route.........................................154Setting a perspective map ........................................169Setting a short route ...............................................154Setting adaptation of the central vents........................138Setting AM mode ......................................................22Setting AudioPilot......................................................16Setting automatic air circulation.................................138Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook..................99Setting autozoom....................................................167Setting colours for the display.....................................18Setting comfort options ...........................................137Setting consumption..................................................20Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) .........................154Setting filtering of background noise ............................16Setting FM mode ......................................................22Setting folding in of the exterior mirrors ......................137Setting light options ................................................135Setting picture parameters (rear view camera)Brightness ....................................................117Colour..........................................................118Contrast.......................................................118Setting picture parameters (TV)Brightness ......................................................31Colour............................................................32Contrast.........................................................32Format...........................................................32Setting ringtones ......................................................91Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) .........................16Setting sound conditioner...........................................16Setting surround ............................................... 16, 17Setting the air conditioning .......................................137Setting the air flow strength......................................138Setting the audio source ..............................................8Setting the balance ...................................................15Setting the bass .......................................................15Setting the brightness (TV mode) .................................31Setting the colours for the map .................................170Setting the day design ...............................................18Setting the daytime running lights ..............................135Setting the display layout..........................................168Setting the display of 3D points of interest ..................169Setting the display of additional data (Sport display) ......132Setting the display of speed limits..............................169Setting the fade-out time ..........................................135Setting the fade-out time for the interior lights ..............136Setting the fader.......................................................15Setting the headlight alignment (driving on left/right) .....136Setting the junction zoom in the map view ...................169Setting the keyboard layout ........................................15Setting the language..................................................19Setting the layout of the letters on the keyboard in the input menu..........................................................15Setting the loudness.......................................... 16, 17Setting the mode (CD/DVD) ........................................37Setting the night design .............................................18Setting the orientation light .......................................136Setting the preset memory in radio mode......................23Setting the reception country for TV mode.....................31Setting the standard trip for the logbook .....................119Setting the temperature display ...................................20Setting the treble ......................................................15Setting the units................................................ 18, 19Setting the volume ......................................................8Setting the volume for a voice control system announcement .............................................175Setting transfer of your own number.............................95Setting TV mode .......................................................22Setting use of the upper ventilation zone .....................138Setting wiper options...............................................136SettingsBluetooth® (external Bluetooth® audio source) .....49Bluetooth® (logbook)......................................124Bluetooth® (navigation)...................................149Bluetooth® (Sport display)...............................133Bluetooth® (telephone) ............................. 67, 95Calls ..............................................................93Display ...........................................................18Extended memory ..........................................135Messages and data ........................................100Phonebook.............................................. 70, 98Picture settings (rear view camera) ...................117Picture settings (TV) .........................................31Radio mode ....................................................25SIM card.........................................................92Telephone (PCM telephone) ................................91Telephone settings ...........................................66Shuffle functionAUX BT...........................................................49CD/DVD .........................................................39iPod...............................................................42USB...............................................................46SIM cardDeleting the contents ........................................77Inserting the card .............................................72SIM settings .............................................................92SIM slot...................................................................10Skipping a track (CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode) ...............10Skipping tracksAUX BT...........................................................49CD/DVD .........................................................39iPod...............................................................42USB...............................................................46Slot for the SIM card..................................................10SMS .......................................................................83Accepting vCards .............................................88Calling telephone numbers .................................89Creating a template ..........................................90Creating and sending a new text message............85Creating using a text template ............................86Creating with attached reply...............................85Creating with new text............................... 84, 86Deleting..........................................................87Deleting vCards ...............................................89Discarding vCards ............................................89Displaying the complete text ..............................90Editing and sending the text of the last message ...86Editing vCards .................................................88Forwarding......................................................87Numbers in text messages ................................89Reading..........................................................84Reading a vCard...............................................87Replying .........................................................84Replying using a text template ............................85Replying with Yes or No.....................................85Storing coordinates ..........................................90Storing telephone numbers ................................89Using coordinates for route guidance...................90SMS service centre .................................................100SMS settings..........................................................100SMS signal tone......................................................100
200 IndexSound settingsSetting AudioPilot ............................................ 16Setting SDV.................................................... 16Setting sound conditioner ................................. 16Setting surround.......................................16, 17Setting the balance.......................................... 15Setting the bass .............................................. 15Setting the fader ............................................. 15Setting the loudness .................................16, 17Setting the treble............................................. 15Sport Chrono package ............................................ 127Sport display ......................................................... 127Continuing recording ...................................... 128Defining the reference lap ............................... 131Deleting a lap................................................ 130Deleting a recording....................................... 130Deleting the reference lap ............................... 131Ending a lap ................................................. 129Evaluating a recording.................................... 129Renaming a recording .................................... 130Renaming the reference lap............................. 131Resetting the defined reference lap................... 131Setting the display of additional data................. 132Starting a new lap.......................................... 129Starting recording ......................................... 127Stopping recording ........................................ 128Storing a lap as the reference lap..................... 131Timing the interval ......................................... 129Transferring data........................................... 132Stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher..................................................... 175Starting a new lap (Sport display) .............................. 129Starting a search (radio or TV mode)............................ 10Starting route guidance ........................................... 143Starting/stopping scanningAUX BT.......................................................... 49CD/DVD......................................................... 39USB .............................................................. 46Station buttons ..........................................22, 23, 27Station list........................................................22, 24PTY filter (programme type)............................... 26Setting sorting (TV) .......................................... 31Setting sorting criteria...................................... 26Station search ......................................................... 22Status of the call diversion ......................................... 94Stopovers ............................................................. 155Deleting ....................................................... 157Entering....................................................... 155Reorganising................................................. 157Storing ........................................................ 157Via destinations ............................................. 156Stopping route guidance.......................................... 143StoringCoordinates (vehicle position) ............................ 90Destination (off-road navigation)........................ 158Destination from the list of previous destinations in the personal destination memory................... 145Key assignment in the logbook......................... 123Lap as reference lap ...................................... 131Phonebook entry ............................................. 76Position ....................................................... 159Refuelling stop (logbook)................................. 122Station (radio) ................................................. 23Station (TV)..................................................... 28Telephone number ....................................78, 79Telephone numbers from a text message ............ 89Storing a destination ......................................145, 158Storing a lap as the reference lap (Sport display).......... 131Storing a position (off-road navigation)........................ 159Storing stations.................................................23, 28Choosing a station in the station list and storing it .24Storing stations manually .................................. 24Storing stations manually (TV) ............................ 28Storing via an automatic station search (radio)...... 24Storing via an automatic station search (TV) ......... 28Storing TV stations ................................................... 28Supplementary services............................................. 83Supported audio formats ........................................... 35SwitchingSwitching to an external audio source ................. 47Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source .48Switching to radio mode ................................... 22Switching between day/night .............................18, 170Switching between main menus................................... 12Switching device on/off ............................................... 7Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on .......... 117Switching on/off......................................................... 7RDS .............................................................. 25Switching the touchscreen on/off ................................ 19TTelephoneAccepting a call........................................58, 74Automatic call answering................................... 95Bluetooth®..................................................... 54Call waiting ..............................................64, 81Call waiting (swapping) and conference.........65, 82Calling a phonebook entry ..........................61, 76Changing the PIN ............................................. 92Conducting calls with the hands-free unit .......58, 73Dialling a number......................................60, 75Direct dialling ...........................................60, 75Displaying the IMEI ........................................... 92Displaying the phonebook...........................60, 76Ending a call ............................................59, 74Entering the PIN .............................................. 73Entering the PUK ............................................. 73Establishing an additional call......................63, 81Holding a call ...........................................60, 76Inserting the SIM card....................................... 72List of previous calls .................................61, 78List of received calls .................................62, 79Making an emergency call ................................. 83Muting the microphone ..............................58, 73Number of the SMS service centre ................... 100Redialling ................................................60, 75Rejecting a call .........................................59, 75Selecting a network.......................................... 91Setting call forwarding...................................... 93Setting the call volume...................................... 66Setting the microphone volume .......................... 66Setting the redial function.................................. 95Setting the ringtone type............................66, 91Setting the ringtone volume ........................66, 91Setting transfer of your own number ................... 95Settings (PCM telephone) .................................. 91SMS settings ................................................ 100Supplementary services .................................... 83Switching call waiting on/off .............................. 94Switching on/off .............................................. 91Switching the PIN prompt on and off ................... 93Switching the SMS signal tone on/off ................ 100Text messages (SMS)....................................... 83Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................63, 80Using a stored PIN ........................................... 93
Index 201Telephone conference ....................................... 65, 82Text message (SMS) .................................................83Accepting vCards.............................................88Calling telephone numbers.................................89Creating a template..........................................90Creating and sending a new text message............85Creating using a text template............................86Creating with attached reply...............................85Creating with new text .............................. 84, 86Deleting .........................................................87Deleting vCards ...............................................89Discarding vCards............................................89Displaying the complete text ..............................90Editing and sending the text of the last message ...86Editing vCards.................................................88Forwarding .....................................................87Numbers in text messages ................................89Reading..........................................................84Reading a vCard ..............................................87Replying .........................................................84Replying using a text template............................85Replying with Yes or No ....................................85Storing coordinates..........................................90Storing telephone numbers................................89Using coordinates for route guidance ..................90Timing the interval (Sport display) ..............................129TMC messages ......................................................109Touch tone dialling ............................................ 63, 80TP (traffic programme)...............................................24Tracing ....................................................... 161, 163Tracing a route.......................................................163Track listiPod...............................................................42USB...............................................................46Traffic Message Channel ..........................................109Traffic messages (TP)................................................24Traffic programmeActivating traffic programme announcements........24Setting the volume of the announcements ............25Transferring data (logbook).......................................124Transferring data (Sport display)................................132Trip data ...............................................................113Tuner......................................................................22Tuning to stationsTuning to stations by entering the frequency manually...........................................23Tuning to stations using the station buttons ..........22Tuning to stations using the station buttons (TV) ....27Tuning to stations using the station list.................22Tuning to stations via a station search .................22Tuning to stations via a station search with scanning ..................................................23Tuning to stations (TV)Displaying the TV picture ...................................27Tuning to TV stations .................................................27TVCalling up the main menu...................................27Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) .....................30Setting picture parameters ................................31Setting sorting of the station list .........................31Setting the reception country .............................31Setting TV mode ..............................................27Storing TV stations ...........................................28Tuning to TV stations ........................................27Video text .......................................................29Twin SIM cards .........................................................72UUndoing a menu selection...........................................11USB........................................................................43Fast forward/reverse ........................................46Repeating a track.............................................46Searching for a track ........................................44Searching for music .........................................44Shuffle function................................................46Skipping to the next track..................................46Starting/stopping scanning................................46Switching to USB mode.....................................44Track list ........................................................46USB interface of the PCM ...........................................43Using geographical coordinates from an SMS for route guidance .........................................................90VvCardAccepting .......................................................88Discarding (deleting) .........................................89Editing............................................................88Sending.................................................. 61, 77Vehicle functionsAdaptation of the central vents .........................138Air flow strength.............................................138Automatic air circulation ..................................138Comfort options.............................................137Daytime running lights.....................................135Entry aid.......................................................137Fade-out time ................................................135Fade-out time for the interior lights ....................136Folding in the exterior mirrors...........................137Headlight alignment (driving on left/right)............136Light options .................................................135Lowering the exterior mirror.............................137Opening the rear blind.....................................137Options for air conditioning ..............................137Orientation light .............................................136Rain sensor ...................................................136Rear wiper ....................................................137Use of the upper ventilation zone ......................138Wiper options ................................................136Video text ................................................................29Calling up video text .........................................29Placing video text over the TV picture ..................30Selecting a video text page................................29Voice control..........................................................172Activating......................................................175Commands ...................................................173Deactivating ..................................................175Emergency cases...........................................185Hands-free microphone ...................................172Operating example for CD/DVD mode................182Operating example for navigation mode .............189Operating example for radio mode ....................179Operating example for telephone mode..............185Operating lists ...............................................178
202 IndexPerforming voice adaptation ............................ 177Setting quick dialogue .................................... 176Setting repetition of commands ....................... 176Setting the display of hints .............................. 176Setting the language ...................................... 175Setting the volume of the announcement ........... 175Speech intelligibility........................................ 172Symbols ...................................................... 175Using the help function ................................... 177Voice entries ................................................ 174Voice control commandsGlobal commands.......................................... 173Local commands........................................... 173Volume of the navigation announcement ..................... 141WWAV....................................................................... 35WMA ...................................................................... 35
Technical data 203Technical dataRadio frequency rangesVHF (FM): 87.5 - 108 MHz(manual tuning in 100 KHz increments)MW (AM): 531 - 1602 KHz(manual tuning in 1 KHz increments)Tuning steps used during automatic station searchVHF (FM) 100 KHzMW (AM) 9 kHzRegional codes for video DVDsCode 1: USA, Canada and US territoriesCode 2: Europe, Greenland, South Africa, Egypt and Middle East, JapanCode 3: Southeast Asia, South Korea, Hong Kong,Indonesia, Philippines, TaiwanCode 4: Australia, New Zealand, Mexico, Central America, South AmericaCode 5: Russia and other countries of former USSR, Eastern Europe India, AfricaCode 6: People’s Republic of ChinaCode 7: Not currently assignedCode 8: International territory such as cruise liners and airplanesAffiliated countries for TV tuner country settingsAfrica: EgyptEgyptAfrica: MoroccoMoroccoAfrica: North, South East AfricaAlgeria, Equatorial Guinea, Ethiopia, Eritrea, Gambia, Ghana, Cameroon, Canary Islands, Cape Verde, Kenya, Comoros, Liberia, Libya, Madeira, Malawi, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Mozambique, Nepal, Nigeria, Sahara, Zambia, São Tomé and Príncipe, SeychellesAfrica: Southern AfricaAngola, Botswana, Lesotho, Namibia, South Africa, Tanzania, Sierra Leone, Zimbabwe, Somalia, Sudan, Swaziland, Tunisia, Uganda, other African countries, other Far Eastern countries, other overseas countriesAfrica: Central Africa, MadagascarBenin, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Ivory Coast, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Gabon, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Congo, Madagascar, Mali, Niger, Réunion, Rwanda, Senegal, Togo, Chad, Central African RepublicAmerica: Falkland Islands Falkland IslandsAmerica: French overseas departmentsFrench Guyana, Guadeloupe, Martinique, New CaledoniaAmerica: CaribbeanUnited States Virgin Islands, Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, British Virgin Islands, Curaçao (Netherlands Antilles), Dominica, Dominican Republic, Grenada, Haiti, Jamaica, Cayman Islands, Cuba, Netherlands Antilles, Puerto Rico, St. Lucia, St. Martin (Netherlands Antilles), St. Pierre and Miquelon, St. Vincent and the Grenadines, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos IslandsAmerica: Central AmericaBelize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama, other Latin American countriesAmerica: North AmericaBermuda, Canada, United States of America (USA), other American countriesAmerica: South AmericaArgentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Ecuador, Guyana, Columbia, Paraguay, Peru, Surinam, Uruguay, VenezuelaAsia: BruneiBrunei DarussalamAsia: ChinaChinaAsia: Hong KongHong KongAsia: IndiaIndiaAsia: JapanJapanAsia: KuwaitKuwaitAsia: MalaysiaMalaysiaAsia: Central Asia, Mongolia, BhutanBhutan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, UzbekistanAsia: MyanmarMyanmar (Burma)Asia: Middle East, AfghanistanAfghanistan, Gaza Strip, Iraq, Iran, Israel, Yemen, Jordan, Lebanon, Qatar, Syria, Cyprus, other Middle and Near Eastern countries
Technical data 204Asia: North KoreaDemocratic People’s Republic of KoreaAsia: OmanOmanAsia: PhilippinesPhilippinesAsia: Saudi ArabiaSaudi ArabiaAsia: SingaporeSingaporeAsia: South AsiaBangladesh, Indonesia, Cambodia, Laos, Macau, Maldives, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, West Indies, other Asian countriesAsia: South KoreaRepublic of KoreaAsia: TaiwanTaiwanAsia: ThailandThailandAsia: United Arab EmiratesAbu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, United Arab EmiratesAsia: VietnamVietnamAustraliaAustralia, Australia/Oceania, Tuvalu, VanuatuAustralia: New ZealandNew Zealand, New Zealand/Oceania, Pitcairn Island, Solomon IslandsEurope: England, IrelandBritish Indian Ocean Territory, Great Britain, IrelandEurope: FinlandFinlandEurope: France, MonacoFrance, MonacoEurope: Northern, Central, Southern, South Eastern EuropeAlbania, Andorra, Azores, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Ceuta/Melilla, Denmark, Germany, Faroe Islands, Gibraltar, Greece, Greenland, Iceland, Italy, Federal Republic of Yugoslavia, Croatia, Luxembourg, Madeira, Malta, Macedonia, Montenegro, Netherlands, Norway, Austria, Portugal, Romania, Sweden, Switzerland, Slovenia, Spain, St. Helena, Turkey, Vatican City, other Western Europe countriesEurope: Eastern EuropeArmenia, Azerbaijan, Estonia, Georgia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldavia, rest of the former USSR, Russian Federation, Ukraine, Hungary, Belarus, other Eastern European countries, other Comecon countriesEurope: Poland, Slovakia, Czech RepublicPoland, Slovakia, Czech RepublicPacificFiji, French Polynesia, Kiribati , Marshall Islands, Micronesia (Federated States), Nauru, Oceania, Papua New Guinea, Samoa, Tonga, Wallis and Futuna– "Other countries" means countries in this region not explicitly mentioned in the list– Spelling of country names subject to correction
205Dear Customer,In conformance with current EC guidelines, any person may operate this unit. This unit conforms to the current valid European or harmonised national standards.It is guaranteed that the unit conforms to the currently applicable specifications regarding electromagnetic compatibility. Interference with other electrical/electronic devices caused by the unit, or interference with this unit caused by other electrical/electronic devices, is largely prevented. List of countries withGSM and Bluetooth approval (extract)Further information is available on our Internet site http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche.Harman/Becker Automotive Systems declares herewith that this device, PCM 3.1, conforms to the basic requirements of applicable EC regulations and especially to the basic requirements and other relevant regulations of the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC.Further information is available on our Internet site http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche.Albania Finland Lithuania RussiaAndorra France Luxembourg SerbiaAustria Georgia Macedonia SlovakiaBelgium Germany Malta SloveniaBosnia Herzegovina Greece Moldova SpainBulgaria Guernsey Monaco SwedenCanada Hungary Montenegro SwitzerlandChina Iceland Netherlands TurkeyCroatia Ireland Norway United KingdomCyprus Isle of Man Poland USACzech Republic Italy PortugalDenmark Jersey RomaniaEstonia Latvia Reunionstatements FCC part 15.19 and 15.21:"This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.""Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
206Bluetooth approvalInformation on the laser equipmentAt the date of manufacture this laser product was classified as a class 1 laser product in compliance with the national/international standards DIN EN 60825-1 : 2003-10 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. The laser beam in this class 1 laser product is so weak that it does not represent a hazard when used as intended. This product is designed in such a way that the laser beam is confined to the interior of the unit. However, this does not mean that the laser installed in the housing could not be classed as a laser product in a higher class without its housing. For this reason, you should never open the unit housing (nullification of warranty or goodwill).Technical data of the laser installed in the unit:Output of laser beam: 0.68mW (DVD) / 0.85mW (CD)Wavelength of laser beam: 665nm (DVD) / 795 nm (CD)The laser diode is not pulsed during operation.QDID: B015165

Navigation menu